| 	
		 3-096-485-11(1)   
					Video Cassette Recorder/   
					DVD Recorder   
					US   
					ES   
					Operating Instructions   
					Manual de instrucciones   
					RDR-VX555   
					© 2007 Sony Corporation   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				For customers in the U.S.A   
					Owner’s Record   
					The model and serial numbers are located   
					at the rear of the unit.   
					Record the serial number in the space   
					provided below. Refer to them   
					whenever you call upon your Sony dealer   
					regarding this product.   
					WARNING   
					Precautions   
					To reduce the risk of fire or   
					electric shock, do not expose   
					this apparatus to rain or   
					moisture.   
					To avoid electrical shock, do not   
					open the cabinet. Refer servicing   
					to qualified personnel only.   
					The AC power cord must be   
					changed only at a qualified   
					service shop.   
					On safety   
					Should any solid object or liquid fall   
					into the cabinet, unplug the recorder   
					and have it checked by qualified   
					personnel before operating it any   
					further.   
					Model No. RDR-VX555   
					Serial No.______________   
					CAUTION   
					You are cautioned that any change or   
					modifications not expressly approved   
					in this manual could void your   
					On power sources   
					• Operate the recorder only on   
					120 V AC, 60 Hz.   
					authority to operate this equipment.   
					CAUTION   
					• The recorder is not disconnected   
					from the AC power source as long   
					as it is connected to the wall outlet,   
					even if the recorder itself has been   
					turned off.   
					• Install this system so that the   
					power cord can be unplugged from   
					the wall socket immediately in the   
					event of trouble.   
					• If you are not going to use the   
					recorder for a long time, be sure to   
					disconnect the recorder from the   
					wall outlet. To disconnect the AC   
					power cord, grasp the plug itself;   
					never pull the cord.   
					The use of optical instruments with this   
					product will increase eye hazard. As   
					the laser beam used in this DVD   
					recorder is harmful to eyes, do not   
					attempt to disassemble the cabinet.   
					Refer servicing to qualified personnel   
					only.   
					Note   
					This equipment has been tested and   
					found to comply with the limits for a   
					Class B digital device, pursuant to Part   
					15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are   
					designed to provide reasonable   
					protection against harmful interference   
					in a residential installation. This   
					equipment generates, uses, and can   
					radiate radio frequency energy and, if   
					not installed and used in accordance   
					with the instructions, may cause   
					harmful interference to radio   
					communications. However, there is no   
					guarantee that interference will not   
					occur in a particular installation. If this   
					equipment does cause harmful   
					interference to radio or television   
					reception, which can be determined by   
					turning the equipment off and on, the   
					user is encouraged to try to correct the   
					interference by one or more of the   
					following measures:   
					VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM   
					DANGER   
					CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.   
					CAUTION   
					KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEÖFFNET. DIREKTEN KONTAKT MIT DEM   
					VORSICHT   
					STRAHL VERMEIDEN.   
					SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING AF KLASSE 3B VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ DIREKTE UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.   
					ADVARSEL   
					SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING KLASSE 3B NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ DIREKTE EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.   
					I 
					ADVARSEL   
					VARNING   
					KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT DIREKT EXPONERA DIG   
					FÖR STRÅLNINGEN.   
					AVATTUNA LUOKAN 3B NÄKYVÄÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ LASERSÄTEILYÄ. VÄLTÄ SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SÄTEELLE.   
					VARO!   
					This label is located on the laser   
					protective housing inside the   
					enclosure.   
					On placement   
					• Place the recorder in a location   
					with adequate ventilation to   
					prevent heat build-up in the   
					recorder.   
					• If the recorder is brought directly   
					from a cold to a warm location, or   
					is placed in a very damp room,   
					moisture may condense on the   
					lenses inside the recorder and   
					cause damage to the video head,   
					tape, and the optical block. Should   
					this occur, the recorder may not   
					operate properly. When you first   
					install the recorder, or when you   
					move it from a cold to a warm   
					location, remove the disc and tape   
					and leave the recorder turned on   
					for about three hours before   
					operating the recorder.   
					– Reorient or relocate the receiving   
					antenna.   
					– Increase the separation between the   
					equipment and receiver.   
					– Connect the equipment into an outlet   
					on a circuit different from that to   
					which the receiver is connected.   
					– Consult the dealer or an experienced   
					radio/TV technician for help.   
					This symbol is intended   
					to alert the user to the   
					presence of uninsulated   
					“dangerous voltage”   
					within the product’s   
					enclosure that may be of sufficient   
					magnitude to constitute a risk of   
					electric shock to persons.   
					This symbol is intended   
					to alert the user to the   
					presence of important   
					operating and   
					maintenance (servicing)   
					instructions in the literature   
					accompanying the appliance.   
					• Do not place the recorder on a soft   
					surface such as a rug that might   
					block the ventilation holes.   
					• Do not place the recorder in a   
					confined space such as a bookshelf   
					or similar unit.   
					2 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				• Do not place the recorder in a   
					location near heat sources, or in a   
					place subject to direct sunlight,   
					excessive dust, or mechanical   
					shock.   
					• Do not place the recorder in an   
					inclined position. It is designed to   
					be operated in a horizontal   
					position only.   
					• Keep the recorder, discs, and   
					cassettes away from equipment   
					with strong magnets, such as   
					microwave ovens, or large   
					loudspeakers.   
					• Do not place heavy objects on the   
					recorder.   
					• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do   
					not place objects filled with   
					liquids, such as vases, on the   
					apparatus.   
					• When you move the recorder, take   
					out any discs. If you do not, the   
					disc may be damaged.   
					10) Protect the power cord from   
					being walked on or pinched   
					particularly at plugs,   
					Copy guard function   
					Since the recorder has a copy guard   
					function, programs received through   
					an external tuner (not supplied) may   
					contain copy protection signals   
					(copy guard function) and as such   
					may not be recordable, depending   
					on the type of signal.   
					convenience receptacles, and the   
					point where they exit from the   
					apparatus.   
					11) Only use attachments/   
					accessories specified by the   
					manufacturer.   
					12) Use only with the cart, stand,   
					tripod, bracket, or table specified   
					by the manufacturer, or sold   
					with the apparatus. When a cart   
					is used, use caution when   
					moving the cart/apparatus   
					combination to avoid injury   
					from tip-over.   
					IMPORTANT NOTICE   
					Caution: This recorder is capable   
					of holding a still video image or   
					on-screen display image on your   
					television screen indefinitely. If   
					you leave the still video image or   
					on-screen display image displayed   
					on your TV for an extended period   
					of time you risk permanent   
					damage to your television screen.   
					Plasma display panels and   
					projection televisions are   
					especially susceptible to this.   
					13) Unplug this apparatus during   
					lightning storms or when unused   
					for long periods of time.   
					If you have any questions or   
					problems concerning your recorder,   
					please consult your nearest Sony   
					dealer.   
					On recording   
					14) Refer all servicing to qualified   
					service personnel. Servicing is   
					required when the apparatus has   
					been damaged in any way, such   
					as power-supply cord or plug is   
					damaged, liquid has been spilled   
					or objects have fallen into the   
					apparatus, the apparatus has   
					been exposed to rain or   
					• Contents of the recording cannot   
					be compensated for if the   
					recording or playback is not made   
					due to a malfunction of the   
					recorder, disc, etc.   
					IMPORTANT SAFETY   
					INSTRUCTIONS   
					1) Read these instructions.   
					2) Keep these instructions.   
					3) Heed all warnings.   
					4) Follow all instructions.   
					5) Do not use this apparatus near   
					water.   
					6) Clean only with dry cloth.   
					7) Do not block any ventilation   
					openings. Install in accordance   
					with the manufacturer’s   
					• Make trial recordings before   
					making the actual recording.   
					Copyrights   
					moisture, does not operate   
					normally, or has been dropped.   
					• Television programs, films, video   
					tapes, discs, and other materials   
					maybe copyrighted. Unauthorized   
					recording of such material may be   
					contrary to the provisions of the   
					copyright laws. Also, use of this   
					recorder with cable television   
					transmission may require   
					instructions.   
					8) Do not install near any heat   
					sources such as radiators, heat   
					registers, stoves, or other   
					apparatus (including amplifiers)   
					that produce heat.   
					9) Do not defeat the safety purpose   
					of the polarized or grounding-   
					type plug. A polarized plug has   
					two blades with one wider than   
					the other. A grounding type plug   
					has two blades and a third   
					grounding prong. The wide   
					blade or the third prong are   
					provided for your safety. If the   
					provided plug does not fit into   
					your outlet, consult an   
					authorization from the cable   
					television transmitter and/or   
					program owner.   
					• This product incorporates   
					copyright protection technology   
					that is protected by U.S. patents   
					and other intellectual property   
					rights. Use of this copyright   
					protection technology must be   
					authorized by Macrovision, and is   
					intended for home and other   
					limited viewing uses only unless   
					otherwise authorized by   
					electrician for replacement of   
					the obsolete outlet.   
					Macrovision. Reverse engineering   
					or disassembly is prohibited.   
					,continued   
					3 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				About this manual   
					Icon   
					Meaning   
					• Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the   
					remote. You can also use the controls on the recorder if   
					they have the same or similar names as those on the   
					remote.   
					Functions available for DVD+RWs   
					+ 
					RW   
					• The on-screen display illustrations used in this manual   
					may not match the graphics displayed on your TV   
					screen.   
					• The explanations regarding discs in this manual refer to   
					discs created on this recorder. The explanations do not   
					apply to discs that are created on other recorders and   
					played back on this recorder.   
					Functions available for DVD-RWs   
					in VR (Video Recording) mode   
					- 
					RWVR   
					Functions available for DVD-RWs   
					in video mode   
					- 
					RWVideo   
					Functions available for DVD+Rs   
					+ 
					R 
					Functions available for DVD-Rs in   
					VR (Video Recording) mode   
					- 
					RVR   
					Functions available for DVD-Rs in   
					video mode   
					- 
					RVideo   
					Functions available for DVD   
					VIDEOs   
					DVD   
					Functions available for DVD-RAMs   
					RAM   
					VCD   
					Functions available for VIDEO CDs   
					or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in video CD   
					format   
					Functions available for music CDs   
					or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD   
					format   
					CD   
					Functions available for DATA CDs   
					(CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs   
					containing MP3* audio tracks or   
					JPEG image files)   
					DATA CD   
					Functions available for DATA   
					DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/   
					DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs   
					containing MP3* audio tracks or   
					JPEG image files)   
					DATA DVD   
					Functions available for VHS   
					VIDEOs   
					* MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard format   
					defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses audio data.   
					4 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				5 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Table of Contents   
					WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2   
					Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2   
					What is a Video Cassette Recorder/DVD Recorder? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8   
					How to Use the On-Screen Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10   
					
					Hooking Up the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12   
					
					
					Step 3: Connecting to Your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15   
					
					Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20   
					
					Step 7: Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23   
					Connecting Another VCR or Similar Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27   
					
					Recordable and Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30   
					Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33   
					DVD Operation   
					DVD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35   
					Playing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35   
					Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36   
					Playing a Title From the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39   
					Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40   
					
					Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44   
					DVD Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46   
					Before Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46   
					
					
					
					Changing or Canceling DVD Timer Settings (Timer List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53   
					Recording From Another VCR or Similar Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54   
					DVD Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56   
					Before Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56   
					Editing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57   
					Changing the Name of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60   
					
					Editing a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63   
					Formatting/Renaming/Protecting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67   
					6 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				VCR Operation   
					VCR Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69   
					Playing a VHS Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69   
					Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71   
					Searching Using Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72   
					Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73   
					Selecting the Sound During Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74   
					VCR Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75   
					Before Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75   
					
					
					
					Changing or Canceling VCR Timer Settings (Timer List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81   
					Recording From Another VCR or Similar Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					Connecting a Digital Video Camera to the DV IN Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90   
					
					
					Using the Setup Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94   
					Clock Setting (Clock Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95   
					Video Settings (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96   
					Audio Settings (Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98   
					
					
					
					
					Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105   
					Notes About This Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110   
					Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111   
					About i.LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113   
					Guide to Parts and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114   
					Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118   
					DVD Audio/Subtitle Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120   
					Cable Box/Satellite Receiver Brand Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121   
					
					7 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				What is a Video Cassette Recorder/DVD Recorder?   
					This is a DVD recorder with built-in VHS video deck, and allows recording/playback of DVD discs and   
					VHS tapes. DVD editing is also possible.   
					Recording and timer recording   
					One Touch Dubbing - DVD y VHS   
					Record TV programs on a DVD or VHS tape,   
					either manually or using the timer. You need to   
					connect a tuner such as a cable box to this   
					recorder.   
					Dub in either direction between a DVD disc and   
					VHS tape with the simple press of a button.   
					Note that copy-protected signals will not be   
					recorded.   
					VIDEO   
					DVD   
					Easy selection between DVD and   
					VCR   
					Control your cable box or satellite   
					receiver - Set top box control   
					Simply press the DVD or VIDEO button to select   
					the media format you want to use.   
					Connect the supplied set top box controller to have   
					the recorder change the channel of your cable box   
					
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					CH 103!   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					103   
					VIDEO   
					DVD   
					8 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Quick access to recorded titles -   
					Title List   
					Display the Title List to view all titles on a disc   
					and select a title for playback or editing.   
					One Touch Dubbing - DV/D8 Dubbing   
					Connect your digital video camera to the DV IN   
					jack and press the ONE-TOUCH DUBBING   
					button to dub a DV/D8 format tape over to a disc.   
					Control   
					Title List (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					01:29:03   
					00:31:23   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					04 LINE 1   
					Dubbing   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					ONE-TOUCH   
					DUBBING   
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					Creating your own program - Playlist   
					Record a program on a DVD-RW (VR mode) or   
					DVD-R (VR mode), then erase, move or add   
					scenes as you like without changing the original   
					contents.   
					Original   
					Playlist   
					Operation restrictions   
					Possible Simultaneous Operations   
					Current Operation   
					VCR   
					VCR   
					Recording   
					DVD   
					Playback   
					DVD   
					Recording   
					Playback   
					*1   
					Playing a VHS tape   
					— 
					No   
					— 
					No   
					Yes   
					— 
					Yes   
					*3   
					Recording on a VHS tape   
					No   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					*2   
					Playing a DVD   
					Yes   
					No   
					— 
					*3   
					Recording on a DVD   
					Yes   
					No   
					*1   
					*2   
					*3   
					When pressing DVD, VCR playback stops.   
					When pressing VIDEO, DVD playback stops.   
					Only for timer recording. You can also record from LINE1 and LINE2 at the same time.   
					9 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				A 
					“Title List”   
					Displays the list of the disc contents,   
					including the recording information and   
					movie thumbnail image, which allows you to   
					select a title to play or edit.   
					How to Use the On-Screen   
					Menus   
					The following three displays are mainly used to   
					operate this recorder. Once you become familiar   
					with the basic operations, you will find the   
					recorder easy to use.   
					Title List (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					01:29:03   
					00:31:23   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					04 LINE 1   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					B 
					C 
					D 
					E 
					F 
					“Timer”   
					M/m/</,,   
					Used to set a new timer recording for a disc or   
					VHS tape, as well as change or cancel the   
					timer recordings you set.   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					OPTIONS   
					“Edit”   
					Used to create or edit a Playlist (unfinalized   
					DVD-RWs (VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode)   
					only).   
					“Dubbing”   
					Used to dub from a disc to a VHS tape and   
					vice versa, and also dub from a DV/D8 format   
					tape to a disc.   
					System Menu   
					“Disc Setting”   
					The System Menu appears when you press   
					SYSTEM MENU, and provides entries to all of   
					the recorder’s main functions, such as timer   
					recording and setup.   
					Used to rename, protect, format, or finalize a   
					disc, or erase all titles on the disc. Also,   
					displays the disc information.   
					Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.   
					“Setup”   
					Displays the “Setup” display for setting up the   
					recorder to suit your preferences.   
					Title List (Original)   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Press ENTER :   
					Timer   
					Edit   
					Title Menu for DVD Title List.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					6 
					10   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Selectable options   
					Sub-menu   
					Selectable options on the System Menu differ   
					depending on the media type, disc condition, and   
					operating status.   
					The sub-menu appears when you select an item   
					from a list menu (e.g., a title from the Title List   
					menu), and press ENTER. The sub-menu displays   
					options applicable only to the selected item. The   
					displayed options differ depending on the   
					situation and disc type.   
					Example: When a disc or a VHS tape is stopped.   
					Type   
					Selectable option   
					+ 
					RW   
					Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.   
					*1   
					- 
					RWVR   
					Example: The Title List menu   
					*1   
					*1   
					*1   
					*1   
					- 
					RWVideo   
					Title List (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					*1   
					*1   
					*1   
					+ 
					R 
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					Play   
					Title Erase   
					- 
					RVR   
					Chapter Erase   
					04 LINE 1   
					Protect   
					- 
					RVideo   
					Title Name   
					A·B Erase   
					Divide Title   
					T 
					LINE 1   
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					DVD   
					Options for the selected item   
					RAM   
					VCD   
					CD   
					OPTIONS   
					The OPTIONS menu appears when you press   
					OPTIONS. You can search for a title/chapter/   
					track, check the playing and remaining time, or   
					change settings for audio/angle/subtitle. The   
					displayed options differ depending on the media   
					type.   
					DATA CD   
					DATA DVD   
					*2   
					Press M/m to select an option, press </, to   
					select the desired item, and press ENTER.   
					*1   
					*2   
					Unfinalized disc only   
					With a disc inserted   
					Example: When you press OPTIONS while a   
					DVD VIDEO is playing.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					Notes   
					Title 1/4   
					T 
					• The OPTIONS menu may not appear during DVD   
					recording.   
					Chapter 1/1   
					C 
					Time 00:00:25   
					• The System Menu does not appear when recording on   
					a DVD, or dubbing from VHS tape to a DVD.   
					• You cannot use the DVD or VIDEO buttons with the   
					System Menu turned on.   
					ENG Dolby D2ch (1/1)   
					00:01:30   
					Audio   
					Remain   
					Subtitle   
					Angle   
					2/2 ENG   
					1/1   
					11   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Step 2: Connecting the   
					Cable Box/Satellite   
					Receiver (Tuner)   
					Hookups and Settings   
					Hooking Up the Recorder   
					Follow steps 1 to 7 to hook up and adjust the   
					settings of the recorder.   
					This recorder does not include a TV tuner.   
					To record TV programs on this recorder, you need   
					to connect the recorder to a tuner that has audio/   
					video output jacks.   
					Notes   
					• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.   
					• See the instructions supplied with the components to be   
					connected.   
					• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not   
					have a video input jack.   
					If you have been using your VCR connected to an   
					antenna, connect this recorder to your VCR using   
					an audio/video cord. In this way, you will be able   
					to record TV programs.   
					• Be sure to disconnect the power cord of each   
					component before connecting. Do not connect the   
					power cord until you reach “Connecting the Power   
					
					You cannot record on this recorder if you have:   
					– a cable box or satellite receiver without audio/   
					video outputs.   
					– cable with no cable box.   
					– antenna only (no cable TV).   
					In the cases above, contact your cable service or   
					satellite service company to see if they can   
					provide you with a compatible cable box or   
					satellite receiver.   
					Step 1: Unpacking   
					Check that you have the following items:   
					• Audio/video cord   
					(phono plug × 3 y phono plug × 3) (1)   
					• Remote commander (remote) (1)   
					• Set top box controller (1)   
					Using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control function   
					• Size AA (R6) batteries (2)   
					This function allows the recorder to control a   
					cable box or satellite receiver via the supplied set   
					top box controller. You can also use the recorder’s   
					remote control to change channels on the cable   
					box/satellite receiver whenever the cable box/   
					satellite receiver and the recorder are turned on.   
					To use the cable box/satellite receiver control   
					function, you need to:   
					– Check the brand code of your cable box/satellite   
					receiver. See “Cable Box/Satellite Receiver   
					
					
					– Set the brand code number and the recorder’s   
					input that is connected to the cable box/satellite   
					
					After setting up the cable box/satellite receiver   
					control, check that the recorder can correctly   
					control the cable box or satellite receiver   
					
					12   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Connecting a cable box/satellite receiver and set top box controller   
					Connect the LINE IN jacks using an audio/video cord.   
					With this hookup, you can record any channel on the cable box or satellite receiver. Be sure that the cable   
					box or satellite receiver is turned on. This connection is necessary to use the Synchro-Rec function   
					
					To watch cable or satellite programs, you need to match the input source on the recorder (L1) to the input   
					jack connected to the cable box or satellite receiver (LINE 1 IN).   
					Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the cable box/satellite receiver.   
					Wall   
					Set top box   
					controller   
					(supplied)   
					Cable box/   
					satellite receiver   
					Antenna cable   
					(not supplied)   
					AUDIO   
					OUT   
					R 
					VIDEO   
					OUT   
					ANT IN   
					TO TV   
					L 
					to antenna input   
					TV   
					Audio/video cord   
					(not supplied)   
					LINE   
					1 
					IN   
					VIDEO   
					to SET TOP BOX   
					CONTROL   
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					CONTROL   
					AUDIO   
					to LINE 1 IN   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Signal flow   
					About AV path through   
					This recorder automatically sends the input signal from the LINE 1 IN jacks to the LINE OUT VIDEO/   
					AUDIO jacks without turning itself on.   
					When you connect a cable box or satellite receiver to the LINE 1 IN jacks and your TV to the LINE OUT   
					
					the TV even when the recorder is turned off.   
					,continued   
					13   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Notes   
					• Synchro-Recording does not work with some tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating instructions.   
					• AV path through function does not work for:   
					– Input signals from the LINE 2 IN jacks.   
					– Output signals to S VIDEO OUT, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, or HDMI OUT jacks.   
					14   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Step 3: Connecting to Your TV   
					Connect the supplied audio/video cord to the LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks of the recorder.   
					To enjoy higher quality images, connect an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug.   
					When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.   
					INPUT   
					INPUT   
					TV or projector   
					AUDIO   
					S VIDEO   
					R 
					L 
					VIDEO   
					(red)   
					(white) (yellow)   
					Audio/video cord   
					(supplied)   
					S VIDEO OUT LINE 1 IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO VIDEO   
					S video cord   
					(not supplied)   
					(yellow)   
					(white)   
					(red)   
					L 
					R 
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					to LINE OUT   
					to S VIDEO OUT   
					(VIDEO/AUDIO L/R)   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Signal flow   
					When playing “wide screen” images   
					
					Notes   
					• Do not connect to the S VIDEO OUT and yellow LINE OUT (VIDEO) jacks at the same time.   
					• During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the S VIDEO OUT jack will output   
					DVD video signals only.   
					• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to the LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks at the same time. This will cause   
					unwanted noise to come from your TV’s speakers.   
					,continued   
					15   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				If your TV has an HDMI input jack   
					Connect the HDMI* OUT jack using a certified HDMI cord (not supplied). You will enjoy high quality   
					picture and sound. The HDMI indicator lights up on the front panel when the recorder outputs signals   
					through the HDMI OUT jack.   
					Be sure to turn off the recorder before connecting an HDMI cord.   
					TV or   
					projector   
					HDMI IN   
					to HDMI input   
					HDMI cord (not supplied)   
					HDMI OUT   
					to HDMI OUT   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					Y 
					VIDEO   
					L 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Signal flow   
					* This DVD recorder incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.   
					HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI   
					Licensing LLC.   
					Notes   
					• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).   
					• During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the HDMI OUT jack will output   
					DVD video signals only.   
					16   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				If your TV has component video input jacks   
					Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or three   
					video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate color reproduction and   
					high quality images.   
					If your TV accepts progressive 480p format signals, you must use this connection and then set   
					
					When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.   
					COMPONENT VIDEO IN   
					INPUT   
					AUDIO   
					TV or projector   
					L 
					R 
					Y 
					PB   
					PR   
					(green) (blue)   
					(red)   
					(white)   
					(red)   
					Audio/video cord   
					(supplied)   
					Component video cord   
					(not supplied)   
					COMPONENT   
					LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					(green)   
					Y 
					(white)   
					(red)   
					(blue)   
					(red)   
					L 
					PB   
					PR   
					R 
					to LINE OUT   
					(AUDIO L/R)   
					to COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					: Signal flow   
					Note   
					During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks   
					will output DVD video signals only.   
					17   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Step 4: Connecting to Your AV Amplifier (Receiver)   
					Select one of the following patterns A or B, according to the input jack on your AV amplifier (receiver).   
					This will enable you to listen to DVD audio tracks through your AV amplifier (receiver).   
					A 
					AUDIO OUT   
					Audio cord   
					(white) (not supplied)   
					INPUT   
					(white)   
					(red)   
					L 
					L 
					AUDIO   
					R 
					R 
					(red)   
					AV amplifier (receiver)   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					to AUDIO OUT (L/R)   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					PB   
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					P 
					R 
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					(COAXIAL or OPTICAL)   
					HDMI OUT   
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					to HDMI OUT   
					Coaxial digital cord   
					(not supplied)   
					Optical digital cord   
					(not supplied)   
					HDMI cord   
					(not supplied)   
					or   
					or   
					to coaxial or   
					optical digital   
					input   
					to HDMI input   
					[Speakers]   
					Rear (L)   
					[Speakers]   
					Rear (R)   
					B 
					Front (L)   
					Center   
					Front (R)   
					AV amplifier (receiver)   
					with a decoder   
					Subwoofer   
					: Signal flow   
					18   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				A Connecting to audio L/R jacks   
					This connection uses a stereo amplifier’s   
					(receiver’s) two front speakers for sound.   
					B Connecting to a digital audio input jack   
					Use this connection if your AV amplifier   
					*1   
					*2   
					(receiver) has a Dolby Digital or DTS decoder   
					and a digital input jack. You can enjoy the   
					surround effect of Dolby Digital (5.1ch) or DTS   
					(5.1ch).   
					You can enjoy the surround function that creates   
					virtual speakers from two stereo speakers. Select   
					“Surround1,” “Surround2,” or “Surround3” in   
					
					Surround 1   
					Surround 2   
					Surround 3   
					*1   
					Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.   
					“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of   
					Dolby Laboratories.   
					“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of DTS,   
					Inc.   
					*2   
					z Hints   
					• For correct speaker location, see the operating   
					instructions supplied with the connected components.   
					• During VHS playback, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					jacks can also output digital audio signals.   
					Notes   
					• During DVD recording, the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					jacks or HDMI OUT jack output DVD audio signals   
					only. You cannot hear VHS sound by pressing VIDEO.   
					• After you have completed the connection, make the   
					appropriate settings under “Audio Connection Setup”   
					
					noise will come from your speakers.   
					• With a coaxial or optical digital connection, you cannot   
					use the virtual surround effects of this recorder.   
					• When outputting from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					jacks, you cannot switch the bilingual sounds on a   
					DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) by   
					pressing AUDIO.   
					• When you connect the recorder to an AV amplifier   
					(receiver) using an HDMI cord, you will need to do one   
					of the following:   
					Virtual speaker   
					Note   
					Make sure that your listening position is between and at   
					an equal distance from your speakers, and that the   
					speakers are located in similar surroundings.   
					– Connect the AV amplifier (receiver) to the TV with   
					an HDMI cord.   
					– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video cord   
					other than HDMI cord (component video cord,   
					S VIDEO cord, or audio/video cord).   
					19   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Step 5: Connecting the   
					Power Cord   
					Step 6: Preparing the   
					Remote   
					Plug the recorder and TV power cords into an AC   
					outlet. After you connect the power cord, you   
					must wait for a short while before   
					operating the recorder. You can operate the   
					recorder only after the front panel display lights up   
					and the recorder enters standby mode.   
					You can control the recorder using the supplied   
					remote.   
					Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the   
					3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings   
					inside the battery compartment. Be sure to close   
					the battery cover properly. When using the   
					If you connect additional equipment to this   
					
					cord only after all connections are complete.   
					remote, point it at the remote sensor   
					recorder.   
					on the   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					L 
					Y 
					P 
					P 
					R 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					to AC outlet <   
					Notes   
					• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD   
					recorder or player, change the command mode number   
					
					• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage   
					and corrosion. Do not touch the liquid with bare hands   
					should leakage occur. Observe the following:   
					– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or   
					batteries of different manufacturers.   
					– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.   
					– If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended   
					period of time, remove the batteries.   
					– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid inside   
					the battery compartment, and insert new batteries.   
					• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked   
					on the   
					front panel) to strong light, such as direct sunlight or   
					lighting apparatus. The recorder may not respond to the   
					remote.   
					• With normal use, the batteries should last about three to   
					six months.   
					• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid   
					place.   
					• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing,   
					particularly when replacing the batteries.   
					20   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				TV INPUT   
					Switch your TV’s input   
					source   
					Controlling TVs with the remote   
					You can adjust the remote control’s signal to   
					control your TV.   
					TV DIGITAL/   
					ANALOG   
					Select the broadcast on a   
					Sony TV that can switch   
					between digital and   
					analog   
					Notes   
					• Depending on the TV, some or all of the buttons below   
					may not work for the TV.   
					• If you enter a new code number, the code number   
					previously entered will be erased.   
					• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code   
					number may be reset to the default setting. Set the   
					appropriate code number again.   
					Code numbers of controllable TVs   
					If more than one code number is listed, try   
					entering them one at a time until you find the one   
					that works with your TV.   
					Manufacturer   
					Sony   
					Code number   
					01 (default)   
					04   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Number   
					buttons   
					Akai   
					AOC   
					04   
					Centurion   
					Coronado   
					Curtis-Mathes   
					Daewoo   
					Daytron   
					Fisher   
					12   
					03   
					12, 14   
					04, 22   
					03, 12   
					11   
					TV DIGITAL/   
					ANALOG   
					General Electric   
					Hitachi   
					04, 06, 10   
					02, 03, 04   
					04, 10, 12   
					09   
					TV "/1   
					TV INPUT   
					TV VOL +/–   
					TV CH +/–   
					J.C.Penney   
					JVC   
					KMC   
					03   
					1 Hold down TV "/1 located at the bottom of   
					the remote.   
					LG/Gold Star   
					Magnavox   
					Marantz   
					MGA/Mitsubishi   
					NEC   
					03, 04, 17   
					03, 04, 08, 12, 21   
					04, 13   
					Do not press "/1 at the top of the remote.   
					2 With TV "/1 pressed down, enter your   
					TV’s manufacturer code (see below) using   
					the number buttons.   
					04, 12, 13, 17   
					04, 12   
					Panasonic   
					Philco   
					06, 19   
					3 Release TV "/1.   
					02, 03, 04, 08   
					08, 21   
					The following buttons are for TV.   
					Philips   
					Press   
					To   
					Pioneer   
					06, 16   
					TV "/1   
					Turn your TV on or off   
					Portland   
					Proscan   
					03   
					TV VOL +/–   
					Adjust the volume of   
					your TV   
					10   
					Quasar   
					06, 18   
					TV CH +/–   
					Select the channel on   
					your TV   
					Radio Shack   
					RCA   
					05, 10, 14   
					04, 10   
					,continued   
					21   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				2 Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					Manufacturer   
					Sampo   
					Samsung   
					Sanyo   
					Code number   
					12   
					The System Menu appears.   
					3 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					03, 04, 12, 20   
					11, 14   
					Setup   
					No Disc   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Clock Set   
					Video   
					Scott   
					12   
					Timer   
					Audio   
					Sears   
					07, 10, 11   
					03, 05, 18   
					08, 12   
					Edit   
					Features   
					Options   
					Easy Setup   
					Sharp   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Sylvania   
					Teknika   
					Toshiba   
					Wards   
					03, 08, 14   
					07, 18   
					4 Select “Options,” and press ENTER.   
					03, 04, 12   
					12   
					Options   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Yorx   
					Title List   
					Language   
					Zenith   
					14, 15   
					Parental   
					Timer   
					Front Display   
					Command Mode   
					Factory Setting   
					: 
					: 
					Auto   
					Edit   
					DVD 3   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					If you have a Sony DVD player or   
					more than one Sony DVD recorder   
					If the supplied remote interferes with your other   
					Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command   
					mode number for this recorder and the supplied   
					remote to one that differs from the other Sony   
					DVD recorder or player, after you have completed   
					“Step 7: Easy Setup.”   
					5 Select “Command Mode,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					Options   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Title List   
					Language   
					The default command mode setting for this   
					recorder and the supplied remote is DVD 3.   
					Parental   
					Timer   
					Front Display   
					Command Mode   
					Factory Setting   
					: 
					: 
					Auto   
					Edit   
					DVD 1   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					DVD 2   
					DVD 3   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					6 Select a command mode (“DVD 1,” “DVD   
					2,” or “DVD 3”), and press ENTER.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					
					finished. If Easy Setup has not been   
					finished, first perform Easy Setup.   
					22   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				7 Set the command mode for the remote so it   
					matches the command mode for the   
					recorder you set above.   
					Step 7: Easy Setup   
					Follow the steps below to set the command   
					mode on the remote.   
					Follow the steps below to make the minimum   
					number of basic adjustments for using the   
					recorder. If you do not complete Easy Setup, it   
					will appear each time you turn on your recorder.   
					Settings are made in the following order.   
					A Hold down ENTER.   
					B While holding down ENTER, enter the   
					command mode code number using the   
					number buttons.   
					OSD Language Setup   
					m 
					Command Mode Code number   
					DVD1   
					DVD2   
					DVD3   
					number button 1   
					number button 2   
					number button 3   
					Cable Box/Sat. Control Setup   
					m 
					Clock Setup   
					C Hold down both the number buttons and   
					ENTER at the same time for more than   
					three seconds.   
					m 
					TV Type Setup   
					m 
					Audio Connection Setup   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					m 
					Finished!   
					To check the command mode for the recorder   
					Press x (stop) on the recorder when the recorder   
					is turned off. The command mode for the recorder   
					appears in the front panel display.   
					"/1   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Number   
					buttons   
					If the command mode for the recorder has not   
					been changed, set the command mode for the   
					remote to the default setting of DVD3. If the   
					command mode for the remote is changed to   
					DVD1 or DVD2, you will be unable to operate   
					this recorder.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					1 Turn on the TV.   
					2 Press "/1.   
					The recorder turns on.   
					,continued   
					23   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				3 Switch the input selector on your TV so that   
					the signal from the recorder appears on   
					your TV screen.   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					Enter the brand code of   
					your set top box.   
					“Initial setting necessary to operate the DVD   
					recorder will be made. You can change them   
					later using setup.” appears.   
					• If this message does not appear, select “Easy   
					Setup” in the “Setup” display to run Easy   
					
					OK   
					Cancel   
					4 Press ENTER.   
					• To re-enter the code number, select   
					“Cancel” and return to step 6.   
					The setup display for selecting the language   
					used in the on-screen display appears.   
					8 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					Select the screen language.   
					Select the input line that you   
					connected the set top box to.   
					English   
					Français   
					Español   
					Line1   
					Line2   
					5 Select a language, and press ENTER.   
					The setup display for cable box/satellite   
					receiver control appears.   
					9 
					Select the recorder’s audio/video input   
					(“Line1” or “Line2”) that is connected to   
					the cable box/satellite receiver, and press   
					ENTER.   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					The setup display for clock setting appears.   
					Do you want to control   
					your set top box with this recorder?   
					(Changes to the current setting will   
					erase all timer settings.)   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					12:00 AM   
					Yes   
					No   
					Set the time and date manually.   
					Month Day   
					Year   
					01   
					01   
					2007   
					Mon   
					Hour   
					12   
					Min   
					00   
					AM/PM   
					AM   
					: 
					6 Select whether or not you use the cable   
					box/satellite receiver control, and press   
					ENTER.   
					10Press M/m to set the month and press ,.   
					Set the day, year, hour, minutes, and AM/PM   
					in the same way, then press ENTER. The day   
					of the week is set automatically.   
					If you want to use the cable box/satellite   
					
					If not, select “No,” then go to step 10.   
					The setup display for selecting the picture size   
					of the connected TV appears.   
					7 Press the number buttons to enter the   
					brand code of your cable box/satellite   
					receiver.   
					
					
					24   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				11 Select the setting that matches your TV   
					type.   
					14 Press ENTER.   
					The setup display for selecting the type of   
					DTS signal appears.   
					Easy Setup   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Easy Setup   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Select your TV screen type.   
					DTS   
					16 : 9   
					4 : 3 Letter Box   
					4 : 3 Pan Scan   
					On   
					Off   
					“16:9”: For wide-screen TVs or standard TVs   
					with a wide screen mode.   
					15 Select whether or not you want to send a   
					DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver),   
					and press ENTER.   
					“4:3 Letter Box”: For standard TVs.   
					Displays “wide screen” pictures with bands   
					on the upper and lower sections of the screen.   
					“4:3 Pan Scan”: For standard TVs.   
					Automatically displays “wide screen”   
					pictures on the entire screen and cuts off the   
					sections that do not fit.   
					If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS   
					decoder, select “On.” Otherwise, select “Off.”   
					16 Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.   
					Easy Setup is finished. All connections and   
					setup operations are complete.   
					
					
					If you use the cable box/satellite receiver   
					control, check that the control works correctly   
					
					12 Press ENTER.   
					The setup display for selecting the type of   
					Dolby Digital signal appears.   
					Easy Setup   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Easy Setup   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Easy Setup is finished.   
					Dolby Digital   
					D-PCM   
					Dolby Digital   
					Finish   
					13 Select the type of Dolby Digital signal you   
					want to send to your amplifier (receiver).   
					If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby   
					Digital decoder, select “Dolby Digital.”   
					Otherwise, select “D-PCM.”   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					z Hint   
					If you want to run Easy Setup again, select “Easy Setup”   
					
					Note   
					To record TV programs using the timer, you must set the   
					clock accurately.   
					,continued   
					25   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				2 
					Affix it so that the set top box controller is   
					near the remote control sensor on your cable   
					box/satellite receiver.   
					Checking the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control setting   
					1 Turn on the recorder and the cable box/   
					satellite receiver.   
					2 Point the recorder’s remote at the recorder   
					(not at the cable box/satellite receiver).   
					3 Press CH +/– and check that the channel   
					changes on the cable box/satellite receiver   
					window.   
					4 Press the number buttons and check that   
					the channel changes on the cable box/   
					satellite receiver window.   
					If you cannot get the recorder to control your   
					cable box/satellite receiver   
					Check the settings at “Set Top Box Control” in   
					“Features” setup (page 101).   
					Check the connection and place the set top box   
					controller near the cable box/satellite receiver   
					
					If your cable box or satellite receiver still does not   
					operate with this recorder, contact your cable or   
					satellite company to see if they can provide you   
					with a compatible cable box or satellite receiver.   
					To fix the set top box controller to your cable   
					box/satellite receiver   
					Once you have confirmed that the set top box   
					controller controls your cable box or satellite   
					receiver, affix it in place.   
					1 
					Attach the supplied double-sided tape to the   
					set top box controller.   
					Remove the backings on the double-sided   
					tape.   
					26   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Connecting Another VCR or Similar Device   
					After disconnecting the recorder’s power cord from an AC outlet, connect the other VCR or similar   
					recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder. See also the instruction manual supplied with the   
					connected equipment.   
					If you connect equipment that has a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec function (pages 51 and   
					
					Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel   
					Connect other VCR or similar device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the equipment has an   
					S video jack, you can use an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug of the audio/   
					video cord. Do not connect to the S VIDEO and yellow VIDEO jacks at the same time.   
					You can connect a second DVD player and record DVDs.   
					Other VCR, etc.   
					OUTPUT   
					VIDEO   
					AUDIO   
					S VIDEO   
					L 
					R 
					S video cord   
					(not supplied)   
					Audio/video cord   
					(not supplied)   
					LINE   
					VIDEO   
					2 
					IN   
					L 
					S 
					VIDEO   
					AUDIO   
					(MONO)   
					R 
					DV IN   
					to LINE 2 IN   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					: Signal flow   
					z Hints   
					• When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect an audio cord to the white LINE IN AUDIO L   
					(mono) jack.   
					• To record from connected equipment, select an input source (LINE1 or LINE2) to match the jack you connected to   
					
					,continued   
					27   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Notes   
					• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.   
					• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded. You cannot dub from DVD   
					VIDEOs to this recorder.   
					• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other equipment’s output   
					jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. Noise (feedback) may result.   
					• If you pass the recorder signals via the VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					VCR   
					TV   
					Be sure to connect your VCR to the VCR-DVD recorder and your TV in the order shown below. To watch video tapes,   
					watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.   
					Line input 1   
					VCR   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					TV   
					Line input 2   
					28   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				29   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Quick Guide to Disc Types   
					Recordable and Playable Discs   
					Icon used   
					in this   
					manual   
					Disc   
					Logo   
					Formatting   
					(new discs)   
					Compatibility with other   
					DVD players (finalizing)   
					Disc Type   
					Playable on DVD+RW   
					compatible players   
					(automatically finalized)   
					Automatically   
					formatted   
					DVD+RW   
					VR   
					+ 
					RW   
					Playable only on VR mode   
					compatible players (finalization   
					unnecessary) (page 88)   
					*2   
					Format in VR mode   
					
					- 
					RWVR   
					mode   
					DVD-   
					RW   
					Playable on most DVD players   
					(finalization necessary)   
					
					Video   
					mode   
					Format in Video   
					*2   
					- 
					RWVideo   
					mode (page 47)   
					DVD+R   
					Playable on DVD+R compatible   
					players (finalization necessary)   
					
					Automatically   
					formatted   
					+ 
					R 
					DVD+R DL   
					VR   
					Format in VR mode   
					using the “Disc Setting” mode compatible players   
					display (page 67)   
					Playable only on DVD-R VR   
					- 
					RVR   
					mode   
					(finalization necessary) (page 88)   
					DVD-   
					R 
					Automatically   
					formatted in Video   
					mode   
					Playable on most DVD players   
					(finalization necessary)   
					
					Video   
					mode   
					- 
					RVideo   
					“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R DL,”   
					and “DVD-R” logos are trademarks.   
					Usable disc versions (as of December 2006)   
					• 8×-speed or slower DVD+RWs   
					• 6×-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2   
					*1   
					with CPRM   
					) 
					• 16×-speed or slower DVD+Rs   
					• 16×-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1   
					with CPRM)   
					• 8×-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double Layer)   
					*6   
					discs   
					30   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Recording Features   
					Editing Features   
					Change   
					Title   
					Name   
					Erase   
					Title/   
					Chapter   
					Auto   
					Rewrite   
					
					
					A-B   
					Erase   
					
					Divide   
					Title   
					Playlist   
					
					Chapter   
					
					*3   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes/No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					Yes   
					No   
					*4   
					Yes/Yes   
					*3   
					Yes/No   
					Yes/No   
					Yes/Yes   
					*5   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					No   
					*5   
					No   
					No   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					Yes   
					No   
					Yes   
					No   
					*5   
					Yes/No   
					*1   
					*2   
					*3   
					CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is   
					a coding technology that protects copyrights for   
					images.   
					Unused DVD-RWs are automatically formatted   
					according to the setting of “Format DVD-RW” in   
					“Features” setup (page 101).   
					Erasing titles only frees up disc space if you erase the   
					last title.   
					Erasing titles or chapters frees up disc space.   
					Erasing titles or chapters does not free up disc space.   
					When using DVD+R DL (Double Layer) discs, see   
					the instructions supplied with the discs.   
					*4   
					*5   
					*6   
					,continued   
					31   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				12 cm/8 cm discs   
					12 cm   
					Playback   
					8 cm   
					Recording   
					Disc Type   
					DVD+RW   
					Recording   
					Yes   
					Playback   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					No   
					No   
					— 
					VR mode   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					DVD-RW   
					Video mode   
					VR mode   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					— 
					DVD-R   
					DVD+R   
					Video mode   
					Yes   
					Yes   
					No   
					— 
					Yes   
					— 
					Discs that cannot be recorded on   
					• 8 cm discs   
					• DVD-RAMs   
					32   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Playable Discs   
					Icon Used   
					in This   
					Manual   
					Disc Type   
					DVD VIDEO   
					DVD-RAM   
					Disc Logo   
					Characteristics   
					Discs such as movies that can be purchased or   
					rented   
					DVD   
					RAM   
					DVD-RAMs recorded by another recording   
					device. 12 cm discs without cartridges, or   
					removable from their cartridges can be played.   
					— 
					VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in VIDEO CD   
					format (with PBC function)   
					VIDEO CD   
					CD   
					VCD   
					CD   
					Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD   
					format that can be purchased   
					CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs created on a PC or   
					similar device in music format, or MP3 or JPEG   
					format that conforms to ISO9660* Level 1/   
					Level 2   
					DATA CD   
					DATA CD   
					DATA DVD   
					— 
					DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/   
					DVD-Rs in MP3 or JPEG format conforming to   
					Universal Disk Format (UDF)   
					DATA DVD   
					— 
					— 
					8 cm DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs, and DVD-Rs   
					recorded with a DVD video camera (Still images   
					recorded with a DVD video camera cannot be   
					played.)   
					8 cm DVD+RW/   
					DVD-RW/DVD-R   
					“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” logos are trademarks.   
					Discs that cannot be played   
					• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are not   
					recorded in music CD or Video CD format, or do   
					not contain MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image   
					files.   
					* A logical format of files and folders on DATA-CDs,   
					defined by ISO (International Organization for   
					Standardization).   
					• Data part of CD-Extras   
					• DVD-ROMs that are not recorded in DVD   
					Video format, or do not contain MP3 audio   
					tracks or JPEG image files.   
					• DVD Audio discs   
					• HD layer on Super Audio CDs   
					• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code   
					
					• A disc recorded in a color system other than   
					NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM   
					,continued   
					33   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/   
					VIDEO CDs   
					Note on DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-   
					Rs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs recorded on other   
					equipment   
					Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-   
					Rs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be played on this   
					recorder due to the recording quality or physical   
					condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the   
					recording device and authoring software. The disc   
					will not play if it has not been correctly finalized.   
					For more information, see the operating   
					instructions for the recording device.   
					Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/   
					VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software   
					producers. Since this recorder plays DVD   
					VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the disc   
					contents the software producers designed, some   
					playback features may not be available. Also, see   
					the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs/   
					VIDEO CDs.   
					Note on DualDiscs   
					A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which   
					mates DVD recorded material on one side with   
					digital audio material on the other side.   
					However, since the audio material side does not   
					conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard,   
					playback on this product is not guaranteed.   
					Notes   
					• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same   
					DVD-RW or DVD-R. To change the DVD-RW’s   
					
					contents will be erased after reformatting.   
					• You cannot shorten the time required for recording   
					even with high-speed discs. Also, you cannot record on   
					the disc if the disc is not 1x speed compatible.   
					• It is recommended that you use discs with “For Video”   
					printed on their packaging.   
					• You cannot add new recordings to DVD-RWs (Video   
					mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) recorded   
					on other equipment.   
					• You may not be able to further record on a DVD+RW   
					recorded on other equipment. Note that recording on   
					such discs may cause the recorder to rewrite the DVD   
					menu.   
					Region code (DVD VIDEO only)   
					Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear   
					of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs   
					(playback only) labeled with identical region   
					codes. This system is used to protect copyrights.   
					DVD VIDEOs labeled   
					recorder.   
					will also play on this   
					ALL   
					If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, a   
					message will appear on the TV screen to indicate   
					that the disc is not playable. Depending on the   
					DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be   
					labeled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is   
					prohibited by area restrictions.   
					• If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this   
					recorder, the data may be erased.   
					RDR-VX555   
					NO.   
					X 
					Region code   
					Music discs encoded with copyright protection   
					technologies   
					This product is designed to playback discs that   
					conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.   
					Recently, various music discs encoded with   
					copyright protection technologies are being   
					marketed by some record companies. Please be   
					aware that among those discs, there are some that   
					do not conform to the CD standard and may not be   
					playable by this product.   
					34   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				z Hints   
					• You can play DATA CDs or DATA DVDs with MP3   
					
					• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, or CD,   
					playback starts automatically depending on the disc.   
					• When playing a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R,   
					DVD-R, and DVD-RAM, you can select the title from   
					
					DVD Playback   
					Playing Discs   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					• When using a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, remove the   
					disc from the cartridge.   
					DVD RAM VCD   
					CD   
					DATA CD DATA DVD   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					Notes   
					DVD   
					• To play a disc recorded with other equipment on this   
					recorder, finalize the disc on the recording equipment   
					first.   
					1 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					4 
					7 
					6 
					9 
					
					TOP MENU   
					MENU   
					Using the DVD’s Menu   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVideo   
					DVD   
					When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalized   
					DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or   
					DVD-R (Video mode), you can display the disc’s   
					menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a disc on   
					the disc tray.   
					Playback side facing down   
					3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc   
					tray.   
					Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front   
					panel display.   
					4 Press H PLAY.   
					Playback starts.   
					To stop playback   
					Press x STOP.   
					35   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Playback Options   
					Z OPEN/CLOSE   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Number buttons   
					ANGLE   
					MENU   
					SUBTITLE   
					AUDIO   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					ADVANCE   
					. PREV   
					REPLAY/   
					> NEXT   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					Button   
					Operation   
					Disc   
					Z OPEN/CLOSE   
					AUDIO   
					Stops playing and opens the disc tray.   
					All discs   
					Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc   
					when pressed repeatedly.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					DVD   
					VCD   
					- 
					- 
					: Selects the main or sub sound.   
					RWVR   
					RVR   
					: Selects the audio source.   
					DVD   
					: Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks.   
					VCD   
					. 
					SUBTITLE   
					ANGLE   
					Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.   
					DVD   
					DVD   
					Selects an angle when pressed repeatedly.   
					If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are   
					recorded on the disc, “   
					display.   
					” appears in the front panel   
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE   
					• Replays or briefly fast forwards a scene when   
					pressed during playback.   
					• Goes to the previous or next frame when pressed   
					during pause mode.   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					RVR   
					R 
					RAM   
					DVD   
					. PREV/   
					NEXT >   
					• Goes to the beginning of the current or next title/   
					chapter/scene/track and starts playback when   
					pressed during playback.   
					All discs   
					• Goes to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/   
					scene/track when .PREV is pressed within three   
					seconds after starting a title/chapter/scene/track.   
					36   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Button   
					Operation   
					Disc   
					Fast reverses or fast forwards the disc when pressed   
					during playback.   
					Search speed changes with each press:   
					All discs   
					(fast reverse/fast   
					forward)   
					*1   
					FF1 with sound   
					(Scan Audio) is   
					available for DVDs   
					with Dolby Digital   
					soundtracks.   
					FR2 and FF2 are not   
					available for MP3.   
					FR3 and FF3 are only   
					available for DVDs   
					and VIDEO CDs.   
					fast reverse fast forward   
					*1   
					FR1 T t FF1   
					*2   
					*2   
					FR2 T T t t FF2   
					*3   
					*3   
					*2   
					*3   
					FR3 T T T t t t FF3   
					Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.   
					Playback speed changes with each press:   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					(slow)   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					RVR   
					R 
					* 
					reverse slow motion forward slow motion   
					RAM VCD   
					DVD   
					T 
					t 
					* Playback direction   
					only   
					T T t t   
					T T T t t t   
					X PAUSE   
					Pauses playback.   
					All discs   
					If you pause playback for more than five minutes,   
					playback starts automatically.   
					To resume normal playback after playing at various speeds, press H PLAY.   
					z Hints   
					Notes on playing DTS soundtracks on a CD   
					• You can change playback options, such as subtitle,   
					audio track, angle, etc., using the OPTIONS menu   
					
					When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise   
					will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To   
					avoid possible damage to the audio system, the   
					consumer should take proper precautions when   
					the analog stereo jacks of the recorder are   
					connected to an amplification system. To enjoy   
					DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external   
					5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to   
					the digital jack of the recorder.   
					• During playback or pause mode, the recorder’s m/   
					M buttons and the remote’s .PREV/>NEXT   
					
					down during playback to fast forward or fast reverse. In   
					pause mode, you can play in slow motion. Three speeds   
					are available, depending on the duration of the press.   
					
					the meaning of the language abbreviation.   
					Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS soundtrack   
					DTS audio signals are output only through the   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL or   
					OPTICAL)/HDMI OUT jack.   
					When you play a DVD with DTS soundtracks, set   
					“Digital Out” – “DTS” to “On” of “Audio” in the   
					
					Notes   
					• If you pause playback of a CD, or DATA CD/DATA   
					DVD containing MP3 audio tracks, playback will not   
					start until you press H PLAY or X PAUSE.   
					• Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio   
					
					If you connect the recorder to audio equipment   
					without a DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “On”   
					in “Audio” setup. A loud noise (or no sound) may   
					come out from the speakers, which might disturb   
					your ears or cause damage to the speakers.   
					,continued   
					37   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				– you edit the title after stopping playback.   
					– you make a recording.   
					Playing quickly with sound (Scan   
					Audio) (DVDs with Dolby Digital soundtracks   
					only)   
					Playing restricted DVDs (Parental   
					Control)   
					You can play quickly with dialog or sound during   
					FF1 fast-forward of a DVD with Dolby Digital   
					soundtracks. Simply press M during playback.   
					DVD   
					If you play a restricted DVD, a message appears   
					asking whether you want to override the   
					restriction.   
					z Hint   
					To turn off the Scan Audio function, set “Scan Audio” of   
					
					1 
					Select “OK” and press ENTER.   
					The display for entering your password   
					appears.   
					Note   
					Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio.   
					2 
					Enter your four digit password using the   
					number buttons.   
					Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC   
					functions   
					The recorder starts playback.   
					To register or change the password, see “Parental   
					
					VCD   
					PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play   
					VIDEO CDs interactively using a menu on your   
					TV screen.   
					When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC   
					functions, a menu appears.   
					Locking the recorder (Child Lock)   
					You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so   
					that the settings are not canceled by mistake.   
					Select an item using the number buttons and press   
					ENTER. Then follow the instructions in the menu   
					(press H PLAY when “Press SELECT”   
					appears).   
					Operations differ depending on the disc. See the   
					instructions supplied with the disc.   
					To cancel PBC Playback   
					Press MENU to display “Menu: Off.” To use the   
					PBC functions, press MENU again to display   
					“Menu:On.”   
					With the recorder turned on and stopped, hold   
					down x (stop) on the recorder for more than ten   
					seconds. The recorder turns off and “CHILD   
					LOCK” appears in the front panel display. The   
					indicator remains lit if there is a timer setting. The   
					recorder will not work except for timer recordings.   
					Resuming playback from the point   
					where you stopped the disc (Resume   
					Play)   
					Press H PLAY again after stopping a disc to   
					resume playback from the same point.   
					To start from the beginning, press x STOP twice,   
					and press H PLAY.   
					To unlock the recorder, hold down x on the   
					recorder until “CHILD LOCK” disappears from   
					the front panel display. The recorder is unlocked   
					and turns on.   
					To stop timer recording while the recorder is   
					locked, press x twice. The recording stops and the   
					recorder is unlocked.   
					The point where you stopped playing is cleared   
					when:   
					– you open the disc tray.   
					– you play another title.   
					Note   
					The recorder will be unlocked when:   
					– you stop timer recording by pressing x.   
					– you insert a tape.   
					– you switch the Title List menu to original or   
					Playlist (DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR   
					mode)/DVD-RAM only).   
					38   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				4 Select the title, and press ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					Playing a Title From the   
					Title List   
					5 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.   
					Playback starts from the selected title on the   
					disc.   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					RAM   
					The Title List menu displays the program titles on   
					the disc.   
					About the Title List for DVD-RWs (VR mode)   
					and DVD-Rs (VR mode)   
					You can switch the Title List to show an original   
					or Playlist.   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					While the Title List menu is turned on, press   
					ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST repeatedly to select   
					either “Title List (Original)” or “Playlist.”   
					
					
					TOP MENU   
					MENU   
					ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST   
					TITLE LIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					To turn off the Title List   
					Press TITLE LIST.   
					z Hint   
					You can also switch the Title List of DVD-RAMs to   
					show an original or Playlist.   
					Notes   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Place a disc on the disc tray.   
					• The Title List does not appear for DVD-RWs (Video   
					mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) that have   
					been finalized. To view a title, press TOP MENU or   
					
					• The Title List may not appear for discs created on other   
					DVD recorders.   
					3 Press TITLE LIST.   
					Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)   
					• Letters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .”   
					1 
					* 
					Title List (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					4 
					3 
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					01:29:03   
					00:31:23   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					2 
					3 
					04 LINE 1   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					A Disc type:   
					Displays a disc type.   
					Also displays the title type (original or   
					Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR mode),   
					DVD-Rs (VR mode), and DVD-RAMs.   
					B Movie thumbnail image   
					C Title information:   
					Displays the title number, title name,   
					recording date, and recording mode.   
					“ 
					“ 
					” indicates a protected title, while   
					” indicates unprotected.   
					D Clock   
					39   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				4 Press ENTER.   
					The recorder starts playback from the selected   
					point.   
					Searching for a Title/   
					Chapter/Track, etc.   
					To turn off the display, press OPTIONS.   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					DVD RAM VCD   
					Notes   
					You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and   
					VIDEO CD by track or scene. As titles and tracks   
					are assigned individual numbers on the disc, select   
					the title or track by entering its number. You can   
					also search for a scene using the time code.   
					• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to use the   
					OPTIONS menu to search for a title/chapter/track, or   
					enter the time code for a playback point.   
					• When playing a Playlist title, you may not be able to   
					search for a scene using the time code.   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Number   
					buttons   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					OPTIONS   
					1 Press OPTIONS during playback.   
					The OPTIONS menu appears.   
					2 Select a search method.   
					“Title” (for DVDs)   
					“Chapter” (for DVDs)   
					“Track” (for VIDEO CDs with PBC function   
					off)   
					“Time” (for DVDs/VIDEO CDs with PBC   
					function off): Searches for a starting point   
					using the time code.   
					3 
					Press   
					M 
					/ 
					m 
					/ 
					< 
					/ 
					, 
					to select the number of   
					the title, chapter, track, etc., you want, or   
					press the number buttons to enter the time   
					code.   
					For example: “Time”   
					To find a scene at 2 hours, 5 minutes, and 20   
					seconds, enter “20520.”   
					If you make a mistake, wait a moment until   
					the display returns to the elapsed playing time   
					display, then select another number.   
					40   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD   
					containing only MP3 audio tracks, the   
					“Music” display appears. Go to step 4.   
					Playing MP3 Audio Tracks   
					and JPEG Image Files   
					3 Select “Music,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Music” display appears.   
					DATA DVD   
					DATA CD   
					4 Select an album, and press ENTER.   
					You can play DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/   
					CD-RWs)/DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/   
					Music   
					10:10 AM   
					DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs) that   
					contain MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image files.   
					Surround:Off   
					Stop 00:00:00   
					MP3_001   
					0/9   
					Prev Directory   
					01-Track1.mp3   
					02-Track2.mp3   
					03-Track3.mp3   
					04-Track4.mp3   
					05-Track5.mp3   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					TOP MENU   
					5 Select a track, and press ENTER.   
					Playback starts from the selected track.   
					When a track or album is being played, the   
					title is shown in a box.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					OPTIONS   
					O RETURN   
					./>   
					H PLAY   
					To stop playback   
					Press x STOP.   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					To pause playback   
					Press X PAUSE.   
					To restart playback, press H PLAY or X   
					PAUSE.   
					Playing MP3 audio tracks   
					You can play MP3 audio tracks on DATA CDs or   
					DATA DVDs.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG   
					image files   
					Press x STOP, and press TOP MENU.   
					2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc   
					tray.   
					When you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD   
					containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image   
					files, the display for selecting a media type   
					appears. When you select “Mix,” you can   
					
					z Hint   
					When playback of all the MP3 audio tracks within the   
					album finishes, the recorder stops.   
					10:10 AM   
					Music   
					Press ENTER :   
					Photo   
					Music menu for this disc.   
					Mix   
					,continued   
					41   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Press OPTIONS to turn on/off the menu   
					icons.   
					Playing JPEG image files   
					You can play JPEG image files on DATA CDs or   
					DATA DVDs.   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					To play the slide show   
					2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc   
					1 
					Press </, to select “   
					ENTER.   
					,” and press   
					tray.   
					When you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD   
					containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image   
					files, the display for selecting a media type   
					appears. When you select “Mix,” you can   
					
					The “Slideshow Speed” menu appears.   
					“ 
					“ 
					“ 
					”: Slow   
					”: Normal   
					”: Fast   
					2 
					Press </, to select the desired play speed,   
					and press ENTER.   
					10:10 AM   
					Music   
					The slide show starts from the selected image.   
					To stop playing, press x STOP.   
					Press ENTER :   
					Photo   
					Music menu for this disc.   
					Mix   
					To rotate the selected image   
					Press </, to select “   
					,” and press ENTER.   
					Each time you press ENTER, the image turns   
					clockwise by 90°.   
					If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD   
					containing only JPEG image files, the   
					“Photo” display appears. Go to step 4.   
					To zoom in an image   
					Press </, to select “   
					Each time you press ENTER, the magnification   
					changes as follows:   
					2× t 4× t 2× t normal   
					,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Photo,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Photo” display appears.   
					4 Select a folder, and press ENTER.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					Directory information   
					Photo   
					10:10 AM   
					To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG   
					image files   
					Press x STOP, and press TOP MENU.   
					Slideshow   
					\\abc\defg   
					z Hint   
					You can also start the slide show by pressing H PLAY   
					in step 5 above.   
					Page 1 / 2   
					Notes   
					To display the previous or next page, press   
					• You cannot use M/m/</, to move the image within   
					the screen while zooming.   
					./>.   
					• Slide show can play in only one direction.   
					• You cannot rotate or zoom during slide show.   
					5 Select an image file, and press ENTER.   
					The selected image is displayed over the   
					entire screen.   
					• If you select “   
					” in the rotated image display,   
					the images in the “Photo” display will not be   
					rotated.   
					To display the previous or next image, press   
					./>.   
					The following menu icons appear in the upper   
					part of the screen.   
					: Returns to the “Photo” display.   
					
					42   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Enjoying a slide show with sound   
					When a disc contains both MP3 audio tracks and   
					JPEG image files, you can enjoy a slide show with   
					sound.   
					About MP3 audio tracks and JPEG   
					image files   
					MP3 is audio compression technology that   
					satisfies the ISO/IEC MPEG regulations.   
					JPEG is image compression technology.   
					You can play back DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-   
					Rs/CD-RWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/   
					DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs)   
					recorded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) and   
					JPEG format.   
					However, this recorder only plays DATA CDs   
					whose logical format is ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2   
					or Joliet, and DATA DVDs of Universal Disk   
					Format (UDF).   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD containing   
					both the MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image   
					files.   
					The display for selecting a media type   
					appears.   
					10:10 AM   
					Music   
					Press ENTER :   
					Photo   
					See the instructions supplied with the disc drives   
					and the recording software (not supplied) for   
					details on the recording format.   
					Music menu for this disc.   
					Mix   
					Note   
					The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs   
					or DATA DVDs created in the Packet Write format.   
					3 Select “Mix,” and press ENTER.   
					MP3 audio tracks or JPEG image files that the   
					recorder can play   
					The “Music” display appears.   
					4 Select an album, and press ENTER.   
					The recorder can play the following tracks and   
					files:   
					5 Select a track, and press ENTER.   
					Playback starts from the selected track, and   
					the display asks for confirmation.   
					– MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) audio tracks.   
					– MP3 audio tracks with the extension “.MP3.”   
					– JPEG image files with the extension “.JPEG” or   
					“.JPG.”   
					6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Photo” display appears.   
					z Hints   
					• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front of the   
					file names, the files will be played in that order.   
					• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start   
					playback, it is recommended that you create albums   
					with no more than two trees.   
					7 Select the folder you want to view, and   
					press ENTER.   
					8 Press H PLAY to start the slide show.   
					The “Slideshow Speed” menu appears.   
					9 Press </, to select the slide show   
					speed, and press ENTER.   
					The slide show starts with sound.   
					To stop the slide show   
					Press x STOP.   
					z Hints   
					• When playing JPEG images, you can also use the on-   
					screen menu. For details, see “Playing JPEG image   
					
					• The slide show is played repeatedly until MP3   
					playback stops.   
					,continued   
					43   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Notes   
					Displaying the Playing Time   
					and Play Information   
					• Some DATA CDs or DATA DVDs cannot be played   
					on this recorder depending on file format.   
					• Only one session of a multi-session DATA DVD can   
					be played back.   
					• Only alphabet and numbers can be used for album or   
					track names. Anything else is displayed as an asterisk.   
					• The recorder will play any data with the extension   
					“.MP3,” even if they are not in MP3 format. Playing   
					such data may generate a loud noise which could   
					damage your speaker system.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					DVD RAM VCD   
					DATA CD DATA DVD   
					CD   
					You can check disc information, such as playing   
					time, recording mode, and remaining disc space.   
					• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in   
					MP3PRO format.   
					• The recorder can recognize up to 499 MP3 audio tracks   
					within a single album. The recorder may not recognize   
					some discs depending on the recording device used for   
					recording or the disc condition.   
					• The recorder can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in the   
					following sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,   
					48 kHz.   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					TIME/TEXT   
					DISPLAY   
					• ID3 tags cannot be displayed.   
					• If you add the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG” to data not   
					in JPEG format, a message appears indicating that the   
					format is not supported.   
					• Depending on the disc or the size of image files,   
					playback may take some time to start.   
					• The recorder can recognize up to 999 JPEG image files   
					within a single folder. The recorder may not recognize   
					some discs depending on the recording device used for   
					recording or the disc condition.   
					Press DISPLAY.   
					The information display appears.   
					Each time you press the button, the display   
					changes as follows:   
					Disc and tape information/date and time   
					• Progressive and lossless compression JPEG image files   
					are not supported.   
					m 
					Disc information only   
					• The image size that the recorder can display is limited   
					to width 32 - 7680 pixels by height 32 - 8192 pixels.   
					• JPEG image files that conform to the DCF* image file   
					format are not supported.   
					m 
					No display   
					* “Design rule for Camera File system”: Image standards   
					for digital cameras regulated by JEITA (Japan   
					Electronics and Information Technology Industries   
					Association).   
					Play   
					Stop   
					0:05:30   
					HQ   
					0:30:00   
					SP   
					Rem 00:25   
					Original   
					Rem 01:30   
					Line1   
					Wed May 02. 2007   
					10:10 AM   
					◆ DVD   
					A Playing status   
					B Playing time   
					C Recording mode   
					D Remaining disc space (in stop mode)   
					Remaining time of the current title (during   
					*1   
					playback   
					) 
					*2   
					E Input source   
					F Date and time   
					44   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				*1   
					*2   
					Also appears in stop mode with Resume Play   
					
					Title type (original or Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR   
					mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode)/DVD-RAMs.   
					Viewing information on the front   
					panel display   
					You can view the information on the front panel   
					display.   
					Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.   
					The displays differ depending on the disc type or   
					playing status.   
					Example: When playing a DVD   
					Playing time of the current title   
					Current title number and current chapter   
					number   
					Clock   
					Example: When a DVD is stopped   
					Clock   
					m 
					Current title and chapter number   
					m 
					Remaining disc space   
					m 
					Input source   
					Example: When playing a CD   
					Playing time of the current track   
					m 
					Current track number   
					m 
					Clock   
					45   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Recording mode and recording time   
					The following table is an approximate guide for   
					the recording time on a single DVD (4.7 GB).   
					DVD Recording   
					Recording mode   
					Approximate   
					recording time   
					(minute)   
					Before Recording   
					Before you start recording…   
					HQ (High quality)   
					60   
					• This recorder can record on various disc types.   
					Select the disc type according to your needs   
					
					• Check that the disc has enough available space   
					
					DVD-RWs, you can free up disc space by   
					
					• Check that the recorder is connected to a tuner   
					such as a cable box or satellite receiver   
					(page 12). See also the tuner’s instruction   
					manual.   
					HSP   
					R 
					90   
					SP (Standard mode)   
					120   
					150   
					180   
					240   
					360   
					480   
					LSP   
					ESP   
					LP   
					r 
					r 
					r 
					r 
					EP   
					SLP (Long duration)   
					z Hint   
					The approximate recording time for DVD+R DL   
					(Double Layer) discs is as follows:   
					HQ: 1 hour 48 minutes   
					z Hint   
					To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other   
					
					HSP: 2 hours 42 minutes   
					SP: 3 hours 37 minutes   
					LSP: 4 hours 31 minutes   
					Notes   
					• Timer recordings will start with or without the recorder   
					turned on. The recorder automatically turns off after a   
					recording has finished.   
					ESP: 5 hours 25 minutes   
					LP: 7 hours 14 minutes   
					EP: 10 hours 51 minutes   
					• This recorder records at ×1 speed.   
					SLP: 14 hours 28 minutes   
					Notes   
					Recording mode   
					• When in a recording mode other than HQ, the recorder   
					compresses the audio/video data before recording.   
					Since the compression rate needs to decrease for fast-   
					moving images or if picture noise is present, recorded   
					data size increases, and available recording time   
					becomes shorter. When recording such pictures, a   
					recording mode offering longer recording time is   
					recommended.   
					• Situations below may cause inaccuracies with the   
					recording time.   
					– Recording fast-moving or images containing picture   
					noise.   
					Like the SP or EP recording mode of VCRs, this   
					recorder has eight different recording modes.   
					Select a recording mode according to the time and   
					picture quality you need. For example, if picture   
					quality is your top priority, select “HQ” (high   
					quality). If recording time is your priority, “SLP”   
					can be a possible choice.   
					Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the   
					recording modes.   
					– Recording a program with poor reception, or a   
					program or video source of low picture quality   
					– Recording on a disc that has already been edited   
					– Recording only a still picture or just sound   
					• Since the recording mode for recorded titles is   
					calculated after sampling the recorded data during   
					playback, it may be displayed differently from the   
					mode you selected when recording. However, the   
					actual recording itself is correctly made in the selected   
					mode.   
					I want to record with the   
					best possible picture   
					quality, so I’ll select HQ.   
					46   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Recording main and sub sounds   
					DVD Recording From   
					Connected Equipment   
					Without the Timer   
					You can record the different soundtracks on a   
					DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) from   
					equipment connected to the LINE 1 IN or LINE 2   
					IN jacks. When playing the disc, you can select   
					main or sub sound by pressing the AUDIO button.   
					Set “Line Audio Input” in “Audio” setup to   
					
					When recording on other discs, select either sound   
					track with the connected equipment before   
					recording.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					You can record TV programs on the recorder   
					through the connected cable box/satellite receiver.   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					CH +/–   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Unrecordable pictures   
					INPUT   
					Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded   
					on this recorder. Recording stops when a copy   
					guard signal is detected.   
					DISPLAY   
					Copy control   
					signals   
					Recordable discs   
					Copy-Free   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					H PLAY   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					Copy-Once   
					- 
					RWVR   
					z REC   
					Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2 with CPRM*   
					- 
					RVR   
					Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1 with CPRM*   
					Copy-Never   
					None   
					* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM   
					
					1 Turn on the recorder and the connected   
					cable box/satellite receiver.   
					Formatting a new disc   
					New, unformatted discs are automatically   
					formatted when first inserted in the recorder.   
					For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, you can select a   
					recording format (VR mode or Video mode)   
					
					2 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a   
					recordable disc on the disc tray.   
					• Unused DVD-RWs are automatically formatted   
					according to the setting of “Format DVD-RW”   
					
					• Unused DVD-Rs are automatically formatted in   
					Video mode. To format in VR mode, change the   
					recording format using the “Disc Setting”   
					
					Recording side facing down   
					Notes   
					4 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc   
					tray.   
					• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same   
					DVD-RW or DVD-R.   
					• You can change the recording format on DVD-RWs by   
					
					• You cannot change the recording format on used DVD-   
					Rs.   
					• The recorder records on new DVD-Rs in Video mode   
					unless you first format the discs in VR mode.   
					Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front   
					panel display.   
					Unused discs are automatically formatted. For   
					the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format   
					(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a   
					
					,continued   
					47   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				5 Press CH +/– or INPUT repeatedly to select   
					the channel or input source you want to   
					record.   
					Notes   
					• Recording may not start immediately after z REC is   
					pressed.   
					• When using the cable box/satellite receiver   
					control, select the channel by pressing   
					CH +/– on this recorder’s remote. The   
					recorder’s input is switched to the connected   
					input (LINE1 or LINE2). You can also use   
					the number buttons.   
					• You cannot change the recording mode during   
					recording or recording pause.   
					• If there is a power failure, the program you are   
					recording may be erased.   
					• You cannot change the input source during recording.   
					• When not using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the connected input   
					(LINE1 or LINE2) by pressing INPUT, and   
					then select the channel on the cable box/   
					satellite receiver’s side.   
					Recording using the Quick Timer   
					(One-touch Timer Recording)   
					You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute   
					increments.   
					6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					recording mode.   
					2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the   
					The display changes on the TV screen as   
					follows:   
					duration.   
					Each press increases the time by 30 minutes,   
					up to eight hours*.   
					HQ   
					HSP   
					EP   
					SP   
					LP   
					LSP   
					ESP   
					(Normal   
					recording)   
					0:30   
					1:00   
					7:30 8:00   
					SLP   
					For details about the recording mode, see   
					
					“c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining   
					recording time appears in the front panel   
					display.   
					7 Press z REC.   
					When the time counter reaches “0:00,” the   
					recorder stops recording and turns off.   
					* 14 hours 30 minutes for DVD+R DL (Double Layer)   
					discs.   
					Recording starts.   
					Recording continues until you stop the   
					recording or the disc is full.   
					Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned   
					on and do not change the channel you are   
					recording.   
					To cancel the Quick Timer   
					Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears   
					in the front panel display. The recorder returns to   
					normal recording mode.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop recording.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop recording.   
					To pause recording   
					Press X PAUSE.   
					To restart recording, press X PAUSE again.   
					To watch a VHS tape while recording   
					Press VIDEO to operate the VCR, insert a tape,   
					then press H PLAY.   
					z Hints   
					• To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other   
					
					• You can turn off the TV during recording.   
					48   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Checking the disc status while   
					recording   
					You can check the recording information such as   
					recording time or disc type.   
					DVD Timer Recording From   
					Connected Equipment   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					R 
					You can set the timer for a total of 12 programs   
					together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up   
					to one month in advance.   
					Note that the maximum continuous recording time   
					for a single title is 12 hours. Contents beyond this   
					time will not be recorded.   
					Press DISPLAY during recording.   
					The information display appears.   
					Press the button repeatedly to change the display   
					
					If you record from connected equipment that has a   
					timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec   
					
					Record   
					0:00:03   
					HQ   
					Rem 00:59   
					Line1   
					Note   
					Do not operate your cable box or satellite receiver just   
					before or during a timer recording. This may prevent the   
					accurate recording of a program.   
					A Disc type   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					DVD   
					B Recording status   
					C Recording time   
					D Recording mode   
					E Remaining disc space   
					F Input source   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TIMER   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					z Hint   
					You can view the information also in the front panel   
					display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the   
					display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during   
					One-touch Timer Recording.   
					x STOP   
					Creating chapters in a title   
					The recorder will automatically divide a recording   
					(a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks at   
					5 or 15-minute intervals during recording. Select   
					the interval, “5 Min” (default) or “15 Min” in   
					“DVD Auto Chapter” of “Features” in the “Setup”   
					display (page 100).   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a   
					recordable disc on the disc tray.   
					If you do not want to divide titles, select “Off.”   
					Recording side facing down   
					,continued   
					49   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				If you make a mistake, select the item and   
					change the setting.   
					3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc   
					tray.   
					Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front   
					panel display.   
					Unused discs are automatically formatted. For   
					the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format   
					(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a   
					
					6 Press ENTER.   
					
					The c indicator lights up in the front panel   
					display, and the recorder is ready to start   
					recording.   
					• If the c indicator flashes in the front panel   
					display, check that a recordable disc is   
					inserted and that there is enough disc space   
					for the recording.   
					4 Press TIMER.   
					Timer – Standard   
					10:10 AM   
					• If timer settings overlap, a message appears.   
					To change or cancel a timer recording, select   
					
					No Rec To   
					Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					No.01   
					01  
					02Media Date   
					StartEnd   
					Ch   
					Mode   
					03  
					DVD   
					Today   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Line1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					04  
					05  
					06  
					7 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.   
					There is no need to turn off the recorder before   
					the timer recording starts.   
					Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned   
					on and do not change the channel selected on   
					the cable box/satellite receiver until the   
					recorder finishes the timer recording.   
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					5 Select an item using </, and adjust   
					using M/m.   
					A “Media”: Select “DVD.”   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop recording.   
					B “Date”: Sets the date using M.   
					To record the same program every day or   
					the same day every week, press m.   
					The item changes as follows:   
					If timer settings overlap   
					Today y Sun-Sat (Sunday to Saturday)   
					y Mon-Sat (Monday to Saturday) y   
					Mon-Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun   
					(every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday)   
					y … y Sat (every Saturday) y   
					1 month later y … y Today   
					The program that starts first has priority and the   
					second program starts recording only after the first   
					program has finished. If the programs start at the   
					same time, the program listed first in the menu has   
					priority. If the end time of one setting and the start   
					time of another timer setting is the same, the   
					beginning of the program that starts later will be   
					cut.   
					C “Start”: Sets the start time.   
					D “End”: Sets the stop time.   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					E “Ch”: Selects the channel or input   
					source.   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					• When using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the channel.   
					• When not using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the input, LINE1   
					or LINE2. Select the channel on the   
					connected cable box/satellite receiver’s   
					side before the timer recording starts.   
					will be cut off   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode   
					
					To use the Rec Mode Adjust function   
					(page 51), select “AUTO.”   
					will be cut off   
					50   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				To change or cancel timer recording   
					
					
					Recording From Connected   
					Equipment With a Timer   
					(Synchro Rec)   
					To use the Rec Mode Adjust function   
					If the remaining disc space is not enough for the   
					current recording, the recorder automatically   
					adjusts the recording mode. Select “AUTO” for   
					“Mode” when setting the timer.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					You can set the recorder to automatically record   
					programs from connected equipment that has a   
					timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect   
					the equipment to the LINE 1 IN jacks on the rear   
					
					When the connected equipment turns on, the   
					recorder starts recording a program from the LINE   
					1 IN jacks.   
					z Hints   
					• You can play the recorded program by selecting the   
					program title in the Title List menu.   
					• When the start time and the channel or input source to   
					be recorded are the same but the “Media” setting   
					differs, the program is recorded to both the DVD disc   
					and the VHS tape.   
					• You can also turn on the timer programming menu   
					from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to   
					select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Notes   
					• Even when correctly set, the program may not be   
					recorded if another recording is underway, or other   
					prioritized timer setting overlaps.   
					• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”   
					flashes in the front panel display.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					• The recorder automatically turns off when a timer   
					recording finishes, even if the recording started with   
					the recorder turned on.   
					• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-   
					Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few   
					seconds.   
					x STOP   
					REC MODE   
					SYNCHRO   
					REC   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Insert a recordable disc.   
					3 Select the line input audio.   
					Set “Line Audio Input” of “Audio” setup to   
					“Stereo” or “Main/Sub” in the “Setup”   
					display (page 100).   
					,continued   
					51   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode.   
					If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording   
					and another timer recording overlap   
					The display changes on the TV screen as   
					follows:   
					Regardless of whether or not the program is a   
					Synchro-Rec program, the program that starts first   
					has priority. The recorder starts recording the   
					second program about ten seconds after the first   
					program has finished. If the end time of one   
					setting and the start time of another timer setting is   
					the same, the beginning of the program that starts   
					later will be cut.   
					HQ   
					HSP   
					SP   
					LSP   
					SLP   
					EP   
					LP   
					ESP   
					For details about the recording mode, see   
					
					5 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					6 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					7 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Features” setup appears.   
					will be cut off   
					8 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					Notes   
					• The recorder starts recording only after detecting the   
					video signal from the connected equipment. The   
					beginning of the program may not be recorded   
					regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on   
					or off.   
					• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec   
					standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing   
					SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be   
					sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO   
					REC, before Synchro-Rec starts.   
					• The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some   
					tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating   
					instructions.   
					• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the   
					Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC   
					indicator turns off.   
					9 Select “to DVD,” and press ENTER.   
					10 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.   
					11 Set the timer on the connected equipment   
					to the time you want to record, and turn it   
					off.   
					12 Press SYNCHRO REC.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on   
					the front panel and the recorder stands by for   
					Synchro-Rec.   
					The recorder starts recording when a signal is   
					received from the connected equipment.   
					When the connected equipment turns off, the   
					recording stops and the recorder turns off.   
					• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the   
					recorder will turn off when the recording ends.   
					• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-   
					Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few   
					seconds.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					To cancel a Synchro-Rec function   
					Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder   
					turns off.   
					If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-   
					Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC   
					indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.   
					52   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				4 Select the timer setting you want to change   
					or cancel, and press ENTER.   
					Changing or Canceling DVD   
					Timer Settings (Timer List)   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					No. Media   
					Date   
					04/15   
					04/30   
					Start   
					End   
					Ch   
					Mode Edit   
					Edit   
					01 DVD   
					02 DVD   
					09:00PM   
					09:15PM   
					10:00PM   
					09:45PM   
					Line1   
					Line1   
					E 
					rase   
					You can change or cancel timer settings using the   
					Timer List menu.   
					03 ---   
					04 ---   
					05 ---   
					06 ---   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Select one of the options, and press   
					ENTER.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					“Edit”: Changes the timer setting.   
					Select an item using </, and adjust using   
					M/m. Press ENTER.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Timer – Standard   
					10:10 AM   
					O RETURN   
					No Rec To   
					Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					No.01   
					01  
					02Media Date   
					StartEnd   
					Ch   
					Mode   
					03  
					DVD   
					04/15   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Line1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					04  
					05  
					06  
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					The System Menu appears.   
					“Erase”: Erases the timer setting.   
					Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked   
					for confirmation.   
					2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER.   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					No Media   
					Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					01  
					02  
					No. Media   
					Date   
					04/15   
					04/30   
					Start   
					End   
					Ch   
					Mode Edit   
					01 DVD   
					02 DVD   
					09:00PM   
					09:15PM   
					10:00PM   
					09:45PM   
					Line1   
					Line1   
					SP   
					SP   
					Do you want to erase ‘‘No.01’’?   
					03  
					04  
					05  
					06  
					03 ---   
					04 ---   
					05 ---   
					06 ---   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					OK   
					Cancel   
					6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer   
					List.   
					Timer information displays the recording   
					date, time, recording mode, etc.   
					If there are more than six timer settings, press   
					m to display the next page.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					Notes   
					• Even when correctly set, the program may not be   
					recorded if another recording is underway, or other   
					prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see   
					
					,continued   
					53   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording   
					currently underway.   
					• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and   
					VCR timer settings.   
					Recording From Another   
					VCR or Similar Device   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					You can record from a connected VCR or similar   
					device. For connection details, see “Connecting   
					
					Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the   
					equipment has a DV/D8 output jack (i.LINK   
					jack). To record from a digital video camera   
					connected to the DV IN jack, see page 90.   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					INPUT   
					x STOP   
					z REC   
					REC MODE   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Insert a recordable disc.   
					3 Press INPUT repeatedly to select an input   
					source according to the connection you   
					made.   
					The front panel display changes as follows:   
					LINE1   
					LINE2   
					DV   
					54   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode.   
					The display changes on the TV screen as   
					follows:   
					HQ   
					HSP   
					SP   
					LSP   
					SLP   
					EP   
					LP   
					ESP   
					For details about the recording mode, see   
					
					5 Select the line input audio.   
					Set “Line Audio Input” of “Audio” setup to   
					“Stereo” or “Main/Sub” in the “Setup”   
					
					6 Insert the source tape into the connected   
					equipment and set to playback pause.   
					7 Press z REC on this recorder and the   
					pause or play button on the connected   
					equipment at the same time.   
					Recording starts.   
					To stop recording, press x STOP on this   
					recorder.   
					Notes   
					• A video game image may not be recorded clearly.   
					• The recorder does not record programs with Copy-   
					Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few   
					seconds.   
					• During recording or recording pause, you cannot   
					change the recording mode.   
					• You cannot change the input source during recording.   
					55   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR mode)/   
					DVD-Rs (VR mode)   
					DVD Editing   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					Before Editing   
					You can enjoy advanced edit functions. First you   
					have two options for a DVD-RW (VR mode) and   
					DVD-R (VR mode): editing either the original   
					recording (called the “original”), or the playback   
					information created from the original (called a   
					“Playlist”). Since each is different in nature and   
					offers different merits, read the following and   
					select the one that better suits your needs.   
					This recorder offers various edit options for   
					various disc types. Before you edit, check the disc   
					type in the front panel display, and select the   
					
					Notes   
					• You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc   
					or a timer recording starts while editing.   
					• You cannot edit recordings on DVD-RWs (Video   
					mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode) recorded   
					on other DVD equipment.   
					To edit original titles   
					Edits made to the original titles are final. If you   
					plan to retain an unaltered original recording,   
					create and edit a Playlist (see below). The edit   
					functions available for original titles are:   
					
					Edit options for DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs   
					(Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs   
					(Video mode)   
					
					
					
					
					
					+ 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					RW   
					RWVideo   
					- 
					RVideo   
					You can perform simple edits. Since Video mode   
					titles are actual recordings on the disc, you cannot   
					undo any edits you make. The edit functions   
					available for Video mode titles are:   
					
					
					– Setting protection against erasure (DVD+RWs   
					
					To create and edit Playlist titles   
					A Playlist is a group of Playlist titles created from   
					the original title for editing purposes. When you   
					create a Playlist, only the control information   
					necessary for playback, such as the playback   
					order, is stored on the disc. Since the original titles   
					are left unaltered, Playlist titles can be re-edited.   
					If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that   
					Playlist is also erased.   
					– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase)   
					
					
					Example: You have recorded the final few   
					matches of a soccer tournament on a DVD-RW   
					(VR mode). You want to create a digest with the   
					goal scenes and other highlights, but you also want   
					to keep the original recording.   
					Notes   
					• Once the disc is finalized, you cannot edit or record on   
					the disc (except for DVD+RWs).   
					• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s   
					control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.   
					56   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				In this case, you can compile highlight scenes as a   
					Playlist title. You can even rearrange the scene   
					order within the Playlist title. See “Editing a   
					
					The advanced edit functions available for Playlist   
					titles are:   
					
					
					
					Editing a Title   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					This section explains the basic edit functions. Note   
					that editing is irreversible. To edit a DVD-RW   
					(VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) without   
					changing the original recordings, create a Playlist   
					
					
					
					
					
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					z Hint   
					You can switch the Title List to show original or Playlist.   
					While the Title List menu is turned on, press ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST repeatedly.   
					ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST   
					TITLE LIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					Notes   
					ENTER   
					• You cannot protect Playlist titles.   
					O RETURN   
					• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s   
					control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.   
					• You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized   
					disc.   
					./>   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press TITLE LIST.   
					When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or   
					DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List   
					(Original),” if necessary.   
					Title List (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					01:29:03   
					00:31:23   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					04 LINE 1   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					3 Select a title, and press ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					,continued   
					57   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				4 Select an option, and press ENTER.   
					You can select from the following:   
					1 Press TITLE LIST.   
					Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the   
					“Title List (Original),” if necessary.   
					“Title Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select   
					“OK” when asked for confirmation.   
					2 Select a title, and press ENTER.   
					*1   
					“Chapter Erase” : Allows you to select a   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					chapter in the title and erase it (see below).   
					*2   
					“Protect” : Protects the title. Select “On”   
					3 Select “Chapter Erase,” and press ENTER.   
					when the Protection display appears. “   
					appears for the protected title. To cancel the   
					protection, select “Off.” “ ” changes to   
					” 
					The display for erasing chapters appears.   
					Chapter Erase (Original)   
					Chapter 1 / 3   
					10:10 AM   
					“ 
					.”   
					Title No.01   
					“Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title   
					
					“A-B Erase” : Erases a section of the title   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					*2   
					01   
					00:00:34   
					02   
					00:00:10   
					03   
					00:04:20   
					(see below).   
					“Divide Title” : Divides a title into two   
					*2   
					Copy   
					
					*1   
					DVD-RWs (VR mode) and DVD-Rs (VR mode)   
					only   
					4 Select the chapter you want to erase, and   
					press ENTER.   
					*2   
					DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (VR mode), and DVD-R   
					(VR mode) only   
					“Check” is selected. To preview the chapter,   
					press ENTER. When playback finishes or   
					when you press O RETURN, the display   
					returns to “Chapter Erase (Original).”   
					About freeing up disc space   
					Erasing titles, chapters, or scenes:   
					– frees up disc space on a DVD-RW (VR mode).   
					– frees up disc space on a DVD+RW/DVD-RW   
					(Video mode) only when you erase the last title   
					or chapter.   
					5 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.   
					The selected chapter is erased from the title.   
					To erase other chapters, repeat from step 4.   
					– cannot free up disc space on a DVD+R/DVD+R   
					DL/DVD-R.   
					z Hint   
					z Hint   
					
					You can also erase chapters from a Playlist title   
					
					Notes   
					• When editing a DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or   
					DVD-R, finish all editing before finalizing the disc.   
					You cannot edit a finalized disc.   
					• You cannot erase protected titles or erase chapters from   
					a protected title.   
					Note   
					If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that Playlist   
					is also erased.   
					• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that   
					Playlist is also erased.   
					Erasing a section of a title   
					(A-B Erase)   
					Erasing a chapter (Chapter Erase)   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					You can select a section (scene) within a title and   
					erase it. Note that erasing scenes from original   
					titles cannot be undone.   
					You can select a chapter within a title and erase it.   
					Note that erasing chapters from original titles   
					cannot be undone.   
					58   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				z Hints   
					1 Press TITLE LIST.   
					• A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased.   
					The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters   
					on either side of the mark.   
					When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or   
					DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List   
					(Original),” if necessary.   
					
					2 Select a title, and press ENTER.   
					Notes   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the   
					point where you erase a section of a title.   
					• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased.   
					• The start and end points of a title may be different from   
					what you have set.   
					3 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.   
					The display for setting point A and B appears.   
					“Start” is selected.   
					• The total playing time of the title does not change even   
					if a scene was erased.   
					• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that   
					Playlist is also erased.   
					A-B Erase   
					10:10 AM   
					Title No.01   
					Start   
					End   
					Start 00:00:00   
					Dividing a title into two (Divide Title)   
					Erase   
					Finish   
					00:00:07   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					T 
					Title No.01   
					May/02/2007 08:00 PM   
					End 00:00:00   
					You can divide a title into two. Note that dividing   
					original titles cannot be undone.   
					4 Press ENTER at the start point of the   
					section to be erased (point A).   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					1 Press TITLE LIST.   
					, 
					When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or   
					DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List   
					(Original),” if necessary.   
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point. “End” is selected.   
					A-B Erase   
					10:10 AM   
					Title No.01   
					2 Select a title, and press ENTER.   
					Start   
					End   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					Start 00:00:10   
					3 Select “Divide Title,” and press ENTER.   
					The display for setting the dividing point   
					appears.   
					Erase   
					Finish   
					00:00:10   
					T 
					Title No.01   
					May/02/2007 08:00 PM   
					End 00:00:00   
					“Point” is selected.   
					5 Press ENTER at the end point of the section   
					(point B).   
					Divide Title (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					Title No.01   
					“Erase” is selected.   
					Point   
					To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or   
					“End” and repeat from step 4 or 5.   
					Divide   
					Start 00:00:00   
					00:00:07   
					6 Press ENTER.   
					T 
					Title No. 01   
					May/02/2007 08:00 PM   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					End 00:00:00   
					7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.   
					The scene is erased.   
					To continue, repeat from step 4.   
					To finish, select “Finish,” and press ENTER.   
					,continued   
					59   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				4 Press ENTER at the point where you want to   
					divide the title.   
					Changing the Name of a   
					Title   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					, 
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point.   
					“Divide” is selected.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					You can enter a title name of up to 32 characters.   
					Since the displayed number of characters is   
					limited, their appearance in menus such as Title   
					List may be different. When the display for   
					entering characters appears, follow the steps   
					below.   
					Divide Title (Original)   
					10:10 AM   
					Title No.01   
					Point   
					Divide   
					Start 00:00:00   
					00:00:10   
					T 
					Title No. 01   
					May/02/2007 08:00 PM   
					End 00:00:10   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					To reset the dividing point, select “No” and   
					press ENTER, then repeat from step 4.   
					ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					TITLE LIST   
					6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks whether to rename the title.   
					To use the same name as before, select “No”   
					and press ENTER to finish.   
					O RETURN   
					7 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Title Name” display appears.   
					
					of a Title” (page 60) to complete   
					renaming.   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					The divided title appears in the Title List with   
					the new name.   
					2 Press TITLE LIST.   
					When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode) or   
					DVD-R (VR mode), press ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST to switch to the “Title List   
					(Original),” if necessary.   
					zHints   
					
					• If the dividing point is set too close to the   
					beginning of the title, the title cannot be divided.   
					3 Select a title, and press ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					4 Select “Title Name,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Title Name” display appears.   
					Cursor   
					Input row   
					Title Name   
					10:10 AM   
					K 
					_ 
					A 
					F 
					K 
					P 
					U 
					Z 
					B 
					G 
					L 
					C 
					H 
					D 
					I 
					E 
					J 
					a 
					f 
					b 
					g 
					l 
					c 
					h 
					d 
					i 
					e 
					j 
					1 
					6 
					2 
					7 
					_ 
					3 
					8 
					4 
					9 
					= 
					# 
					( 
					5 
					0 
					. 
					M 
					R 
					N 
					S 
					X 
					O 
					T 
					Y 
					k 
					p 
					u 
					z 
					m 
					r 
					n 
					s 
					x 
					o 
					t 
					- 
					+ 
					Q 
					V 
					q 
					v 
					@ 
					& 
					$ 
					) 
					~ 
					% 
					! 
					^ 
					W 
					w 
					y 
					Backspace   
					Space   
					Delete   
					Clear   
					Finish   
					Setting buttons   
					Character palette   
					60   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				5 Select the character you want to enter   
					using M/m/</,, and press ENTER.   
					The selected character appears in the input   
					row.   
					Creating a Playlist   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					You can only enter characters and symbols   
					that are displayed.   
					Playlist titles allow you to edit without changing   
					the original recordings (see “Edit options for   
					
					page 56). You can create a Playlist title by   
					combining up to 99 sections (scenes) from original   
					titles.   
					• To change the cursor position, select the   
					input row using M, and press </,.   
					• To erase a character, select either of the   
					following setting buttons and press ENTER.   
					“Backspace”: Erases the character to the left   
					of the cursor.   
					Notes   
					• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that   
					Playlist is also erased.   
					• You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized   
					disc.   
					“Delete”: Erases the character at the cursor   
					position.   
					“Clear”: Erases all the characters in the input   
					row.   
					• To insert a space, move the cursor to the   
					desired position, select “Space,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					• To insert a character, move the cursor to the   
					desired position, select the character, and   
					press ENTER.   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TITLE LIST   
					ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST   
					6 Repeat step 5 to enter the remaining   
					characters.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					To return to the Title List without renaming   
					the title, press O RETURN.   
					./>   
					H PLAY   
					7 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					z Hint   
					
					7 above when the “Disc Name” display appears.   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					Title List (Original)   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Press ENTER :   
					Timer   
					Edit   
					Title Menu for DVD Title List.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					,continued   
					61   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.   
					Playing a Playlist title   
					Edit   
					10:10 AM   
					1 Press TITLE LIST.   
					Title List   
					Create Playlist   
					Edit Playlist   
					Timer   
					2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the   
					Edit   
					“Playlist” Title List.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					3 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.   
					4 Select “Create Playlist,” and press ENTER.   
					The display for creating a Playlist appears.   
					“Start” is selected.   
					z Hint   
					When a Playlist title is created, the start and end points   
					will become chapter marks, and each scene will become   
					a chapter.   
					Create Playlist   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No.01   
					Notes   
					Start   
					End   
					• The picture may pause when an edited scene is played.   
					• The start and end points in a title may be different from   
					what you have set.   
					Start 00:00:00   
					Make   
					Finish   
					00:00:07   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					---/--/---- --:--   
					End 00:00:00   
					5 Press ENTER at the start point.   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					, 
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point.   
					“End” is selected.   
					Create Playlist   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No.01   
					Start   
					End   
					Start 00:00:10   
					Make   
					Finish   
					00:00:10   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					---/--/---- --:--   
					End 00:00:00   
					6 Press ENTER at the end point.   
					“Make” is selected.   
					To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or   
					“End” and repeat step 5 or 6.   
					7 Press ENTER.   
					The selected section is captured as a scene. To   
					continue, repeat from step 5.   
					8 When you finish capturing scenes, select   
					“Finish” and press ENTER.   
					62   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				4 Select “Edit Playlist,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Playlist” Title List appears.   
					Editing a Playlist   
					Playlist   
					10:10 AM   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					1/2   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					00:05:04   
					00:00:51   
					> 
					> 
					You can edit Playlist titles or scenes within them,   
					without changing the actual recordings.   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					DVD   
					May/02/2007   
					03:25 PM   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					6 Select an option, and press ENTER.   
					Select from the following options. For details,   
					see the pages in parentheses.   
					O RETURN   
					./>   
					H PLAY   
					“Title Erase”: Erases the title. Select “OK”   
					when asked for confirmation.   
					“Chapter Erase”: Allows you to select   
					
					“Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title   
					
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					“A-B Erase”: Allows you to select sections in   
					
					“Edit Scene”: Allows you to re-edit scenes in   
					the Playlist title. Go to step 7.   
					“Divide Title”: Divides the title in two at a   
					
					“Combine Titles”: Allows you to combine   
					
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					Title List (Original)   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					7 Select “Edit Scene,” and press ENTER.   
					The display for editing scenes appears.   
					Press ENTER :   
					Timer   
					Edit   
					Title Menu for DVD Title List.   
					Edit Scene   
					Scene No.1 / 3   
					10:10 AM   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Playlist No.01   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					01   
					00:00:34   
					02   
					00:00:10   
					03   
					00:04:20   
					3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.   
					Copy   
					Edit   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Create Playlist   
					Edit Playlist   
					Timer   
					“Check”: Allows you to preview a scene.   
					Starts playback of the selected scene when   
					you press ENTER. The display returns to the   
					“Edit Scene” display when the playback   
					finishes or when you press O RETURN.   
					
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					“Modify”: Allows you to change the start and   
					
					,continued   
					63   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				“Move”: Allows you to change scene order   
					
					3 Select a Playlist title to be combined.   
					“Add”: Allows you to add other scenes before   
					
					“Copy”: Allows you to copy a scene   
					
					Playlist   
					10:10 AM   
					3/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					00:05:04   
					00:00:51   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					04 LINE 1   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					May/15/2007   
					11:30 PM   
					To turn off the display   
					Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					4 Press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					z Hint   
					5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks whether to rename the title.   
					To use the same name as before, select “No”   
					and press ENTER to finish.   
					The Resume Play function will work for scene playback.   
					Note   
					You cannot create or edit Playlist titles on a finalized   
					disc.   
					6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Title Name” display appears.   
					Combining two titles into one   
					(Combine Titles)   
					
					of a Title” (page 60) to complete   
					renaming.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					The two Playlist titles become one Playlist   
					title with the new name.   
					You can select a Playlist title and combine it with   
					another Playlist title.   
					Erasing a scene (Erase)   
					1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					(page 63) to select a Playlist title.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					- 
					RWVR   
					- 
					RVR   
					You can erase a selected scene.   
					2 Select “Combine Titles,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					The next title below is also selected.   
					
					The “Edit Scene” display appears.   
					Playlist   
					10:10 AM   
					2 Select the scene you want to erase, and   
					press ENTER.   
					1/4   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					00:05:04   
					00:00:51   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					> 
					3 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.   
					04 LINE 1   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.   
					May/02/2007   
					03:25 PM   
					The selected scene is erased.   
					To erase other scenes, repeat from step 2.   
					Modifying a scene (Modify)   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					You can change the start and end point of the   
					selected scene.   
					64   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					
					Moving a scene (Move)   
					The “Edit Scene” display appears.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					2 Select the scene you want to modify, and   
					press ENTER.   
					You can change the scene order within the Playlist   
					title.   
					3 Select “Modify,” and press ENTER.   
					1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					“Start” is selected.   
					
					Modify   
					10:10 AM   
					The “Edit Scene” display appears.   
					Scene No.01   
					2 Select the scene you want to move, and   
					press ENTER.   
					Start   
					End   
					3 Select “Move,” and press ENTER.   
					Start 00:00:00   
					End 00:00:00   
					Change   
					Cancel   
					Edit Scene   
					10:10 AM   
					00:00:07   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					Scene No. 2 / 3   
					Playlist No.01   
					May/02/2007 03:25 PM   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					01   
					00:00:34   
					02   
					00:00:10   
					03   
					00:04:20   
					4 Press ENTER at the start point.   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					, 
					Copy   
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point.   
					“End” is selected.   
					4 Select a new location using </,, and   
					press ENTER.   
					Modify   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No.01   
					The selected scene moves to the new location.   
					To move other scenes, repeat from step 2.   
					Start   
					End   
					Edit Scene   
					Scene No. 3 / 3   
					10:10 AM   
					Start 00:00:10   
					End 00:00:00   
					Playlist No.01   
					Change   
					Cancel   
					00:00:10   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					May/02/2007 03:25 PM   
					01   
					00:00:34   
					02   
					00:04:20   
					03   
					00:00:10   
					5 Press ENTER at the end point.   
					“Change” is selected.   
					Copy   
					To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or   
					“End” and repeat step 4 or 5.   
					Adding a scene (Add)   
					6 Press ENTER.   
					The display returns to the “Edit Scene”   
					display.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					The re-selected section is captured as a scene.   
					To modify other scenes, repeat from step 2.   
					You can add a scene before the selected scene.   
					1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					
					To cancel modifying   
					Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Edit Scene” display appears.   
					2 Select the location where you want to add,   
					and press ENTER.   
					Note   
					A new scene will be added before the selected   
					scene.   
					The start and end point of a scene may be different from   
					what you have set.   
					,continued   
					65   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				3 Select “Add,” and press ENTER.   
					Copying a scene (Copy)   
					“Start” is selected.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					Add   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No.01   
					You can copy and add a selected scene.   
					Start   
					End   
					Add   
					1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”   
					Start 00:00:00   
					End 00:00:00   
					
					00:00:07   
					The “Edit Scene” display appears.   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					Cancel   
					May/02/2007 03:25 PM   
					2 Select the scene you want to copy, and   
					press ENTER.   
					4 Press ENTER at the start point.   
					3 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					, 
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point.   
					Edit Scene   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No. 2 / 3   
					Playlist No.01   
					“End” is selected.   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					Add   
					10:10 AM   
					01   
					00:00:34   
					02   
					00:00:10   
					03   
					00:04:20   
					Scene No.01   
					Start   
					End   
					Add   
					Copy   
					Start 00:00:10   
					End 00:00:00   
					00:00:10   
					4 Select a location to copy to using </,   
					and press ENTER.   
					T 
					Playlist No. 01   
					Cancel   
					May/02/2007 03:25 PM   
					The scene is copied to the selected location.   
					To copy other scenes, repeat from step 2.   
					5 Press ENTER at the end point.   
					“Add” is selected.   
					Edit Scene   
					Scene No. 1 / 4   
					10:10 AM   
					To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or   
					“End” and repeat step 4 or 5.   
					Playlist No.01   
					Check   
					Erase   
					Modify   
					Move   
					Add   
					6 Press ENTER.   
					01   
					04   
					00:00:10   
					00:04:20   
					02   
					00:00:34   
					03   
					00:00:10   
					The display returns to the “Edit Scene”   
					display.   
					Copy   
					The selected section is added before the scene   
					selected in step 2.   
					To add other scenes, repeat from step 2.   
					To cancel adding   
					Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.   
					Note   
					The start and end point of a scene may be different from   
					what you have set.   
					66   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				B “DiscProtect”(DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs   
					(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode) only):   
					Protects all titles on the disc when   
					“Protected” is selected. To cancel the   
					protection, select “Not Protected.”   
					Formatting/Renaming/   
					Protecting a Disc   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					C “Disc Format” (DVD+RWs/DVD-   
					RWs/DVD-Rs only): Erases all   
					contents of the disc, including protected   
					titles, and makes a blank disc (except   
					DVD-Rs).   
					The “Disc Setting” display allows you to check the   
					disc information or change the disc name.   
					Depending on the disc type, you can also format or   
					set protection.   
					For DVD-RWs, select a recording   
					format (“VR Mode” or “Video Mode”)   
					according to your needs.   
					To format unused DVD-Rs in VR   
					mode, select “VR Mode” and then   
					“OK.”   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					D “Disc Finalize”: Finalizes a disc. See   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					page 88 for details.   
					E “Disc Information”: Displays the   
					following information.   
					• Disc name   
					O RETURN   
					• Disc type (and recording format for a   
					DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR   
					mode))   
					• Total number of titles   
					• Protect setting   
					• The oldest and most recent recording   
					date   
					• The total available recording time in   
					each recording mode   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					3 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Disc Setting” display appears.   
					Disc Information   
					10:10 AM   
					Disc Name   
					Disc 1   
					Disc Setting   
					10:10 AM   
					Media   
					DVD-RW   
					Format   
					VR Mode   
					1 
					2 
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Disc Name   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					Title No.   
					Protected   
					Date   
					Original 6 / Playlist 1   
					Not Protected   
					Disc Protect   
					Not Protected   
					VR Mode   
					Disc Format   
					3 
					4 
					Edit   
					4/05/2007 ~ 4/30/2007   
					Disc Finalize   
					Disc Information   
					Erase All Titles   
					Unfinalized   
					Remainder   
					HQ : 0H 57M HSP : 1H 26M SP : 1H 55M   
					LSP : 2H 23M ESP : 2H 52M LP : 3H 50M   
					EP : 5H 46M SLP : 7H 40M 4.4/4.7GB   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					5 
					6 
					F “Erase All Titles” (DVD+RWs/DVD-   
					RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) only):   
					Erases all titles on the disc (except   
					protected titles). Select “OK” when   
					asked for confirmation.   
					4 Select an option, and press ENTER.   
					A “Disc Name”: Allows you to rename a   
					disc.   
					For details on how to enter characters,   
					
					For DVD-RWs (VR mode)/DVD-Rs   
					(VR mode), Playlist titles created with   
					protected titles are also erased.   
					,continued   
					67   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					z Hints   
					
					• By reformatting, you can change the recording format   
					on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-RWs (Video   
					mode) that have been finalized.   
					Notes   
					• You can label a disc using up to 32 characters;   
					however, the name may not display on other DVD   
					equipment.   
					• You cannot label an unused DVD-R (Video mode)   
					disc. Label the disc after you first record on it.   
					• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same   
					DVD-RW or DVD-R.   
					• You cannot change the recording format on used DVD-   
					Rs.   
					• The recorder records on new DVD-Rs in Video mode   
					
					68   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				To stop playback   
					Press x STOP.   
					VCR Playback   
					To eject the tape   
					Press Z OPEN/CLOSE.   
					Playing a VHS Tape   
					To turn off the power while rewinding (Rewind   
					Shut Off)   
					Press "/1 while the tape is rewinding. The power   
					will turn off but the tape will keep rewinding until   
					it reaches the end.   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					"/1   
					VIDEO   
					TRACKING +/–   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					To use the time counter   
					Press CLEAR at the point where you want to find   
					later. The counter in the front panel display resets   
					to “0:00:00.”   
					DISPLAY   
					CLEAR   
					To search for the 0:00:00 point automatically, see   
					
					To display the counter on the TV screen, press   
					DISPLAY.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					Notes   
					• During playback, the VCR automatically detects the   
					recording system (S-VHS/VHS) and the recording   
					mode (SP or EP) from the tape. LP mode recordings   
					made on other equipment will play, but picture quality   
					is not guaranteed.   
					• The counter resets to “0:00:00” whenever a tape is   
					reinserted.   
					• The counter stops counting when it comes to a portion   
					with no recording.   
					• The counter resets to “0:00:00” after ten hours, and   
					starts recounting.   
					• When playback does not start even if you insert a tape   
					with its safety tab removed, set “VCR Function” –   
					“Auto Play” of “Features” to “On” in the “Setup”   
					
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					2 Insert a tape.   
					Playback starts automatically if you insert a   
					tape with its safety tab removed.   
					• If you switch to the VCR while playing a disc, DVD   
					playback stops.   
					• The VCR does not record in S-VHS format, but will   
					play S-VHS tapes by automatically detecting the   
					format, but picture quality will be lower than usual S-   
					VHS. Image may be unclear if playback options such   
					as slow-motion, etc., are used.   
					3 Press H PLAY.   
					The front panel display shows the playing   
					time.   
					• Playback of S-VHS tapes recorded in EP (3x) mode is   
					not guaranteed.   
					• The VCR is not compatible with the PAL or SECAM   
					color system. Only NTSC tapes can be played.   
					
					When the tape reaches the end, it will rewind   
					automatically.   
					,continued   
					69   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Adjusting the picture (tracking)   
					You can manually adjust tracking if the recording   
					quality is too poor to be remedied by the VCR’s   
					automatic tracking (a tracking meter appears   
					during the automatic tracking).   
					Press TRACKING +/–.   
					The tracking meter appears.   
					Press TRACKING +/– repeatedly until the   
					distortion disappears.   
					Tracking   
					Tracking meter   
					To resume automatic tracking   
					Press TRACKING + and TRACKING – on the   
					recorder at the same time for more than ten   
					seconds. Or, eject the tape and reinsert it.   
					70   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Playback Options   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE   
					. PREV   
					> NEXT   
					H PLAY   
					X PAUSE   
					Button   
					Operation   
					• Fast reverses or fast forwards when pressed during stop mode.   
					When you hold down during fast reverse or fast forward, you can view the picture.   
					• Plays at high speed when briefly pressed during playback.   
					When you hold down the button during playback, the high-speed play continues until   
					you release the button.   
					(fast reverse/fast   
					forward)   
					Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.   
					• Advances one frame for each press in pause mode.   
					(slow)   
					ADVANCE   
					*1   
					• Fast forwards the current scene for 30 seconds when pressed during playback.   
					*2   
					REPLAY   
					Replays the previous scene when pressed during playback.   
					. PREV/   
					Press during playback. Playback speed changes with each press:   
					NEXT >   
					–×7   
					y 
					–×5   
					y 
					–×3   
					y 
					PAUSE   
					y 
					SLOW y PLAY y ×2   
					y 
					×3   
					y 
					×5   
					y 
					×7   
					X PAUSE   
					Pauses playback.   
					If you pause playback for more than five minutes, playback starts automatically.   
					*1   
					*2   
					Can be pressed up to four times to forward about   
					two minutes.   
					For 10 seconds in SP or LP mode/for 15 seconds in EP   
					mode.   
					Notes   
					• The sound is muted during playback at various speeds.   
					• The picture may show noise during high-speed reverse   
					play.   
					To resume normal playback, press H PLAY.   
					71   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Searching Using Various   
					Functions   
					Go to Zero   
					0:00:00   
					The VCR automatically marks the tape with an   
					index signal at the point where each recording   
					begins.   
					You can easily find a specific point using various   
					search functions.   
					“End Search”: Searches for the beginning of a   
					blank space. If no blank space is found, the   
					tape will reach the end.   
					Note   
					During DVD recording, you cannot use VCR search   
					functions.   
					End search   
					0:00:13   
					VIDEO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					M/m/</,,   
					“Forward Intro Scan”/“Reverse Intro Scan”:   
					Searches for an index mark and plays back for   
					about five seconds at that point.   
					ENTER   
					OPTIONS   
					Press H PLAY to view that program. If you   
					do not press H PLAY, the VCR   
					automatically searches for the next index   
					mark, or until it reaches the end of the tape.   
					H PLAY   
					CLEAR   
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					2 Press OPTIONS.   
					Scan and play   
					–0:00:01   
					3 Select a search method from the OPTIONS   
					menu, and press ENTER.   
					Go To Zero   
					End Search   
					Notes   
					• The VCR may not recognize the end of a blank space   
					depending on its length.   
					• No index signal is marked if you pause a recording and   
					then keep recording the same program. To mark an   
					index, press x STOP or change the input source once   
					during recording pause.   
					Forward Intro Scan   
					Reverse Intro Scan   
					Move ENTER Enter   
					“Go To Zero”: Searches for the 0:00:00 point   
					on the tape counter.   
					To reset the counter to 0:00:00, press CLEAR.   
					72   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Viewing information on the front   
					panel display   
					You can view the information on the front panel   
					display.   
					Displaying the Playing Time   
					and Play Information   
					You can check playback information, such as   
					elapsed or remaining time, recording mode, etc.,   
					on the TV screen.   
					Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.   
					The displays differ depending on the status.   
					Example: When playing a tape   
					Elapsed time   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					TIME/TEXT   
					Remaining tape length   
					DISPLAY   
					Clock   
					Press DISPLAY during playback.   
					The information display appears.   
					Each time you press the button, the display   
					changes as follows:   
					Example: When a tape is in stop mode   
					Clock   
					Tape and disc information/date and time   
					m 
					m 
					Elapsed time   
					Tape information only   
					m 
					m 
					Remaining tape length   
					m 
					No display   
					Input source   
					Stop   
					Play   
					0:05:30   
					HQ   
					0:30:00   
					SP   
					Rem 00:25   
					Line1   
					Rem 01:30   
					Line1   
					Wed May 02. 2007   
					10:10 AM   
					A Playing status   
					B Time counter (elapsed time)   
					C Recording mode   
					D Remaining tape length   
					E Input source   
					F Date and time   
					73   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Notes   
					Selecting the Sound During   
					Playback   
					• To play a tape in stereo, you must use the A/V   
					connections.   
					• When you play a tape recorded in monaural, the sound   
					is heard in monaural regardless of the AUDIO setting.   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					AUDIO   
					Press AUDIO repeatedly during playback.   
					To listen to   
					On-screen   
					display   
					Front panel   
					display   
					Stereo   
					Hi-Fi   
					Left   
					STEREO   
					STEREO   
					STEREO   
					STEREO*   
					Left channel   
					Right channel   
					Right   
					Mono   
					Monaural   
					sound on the   
					normal audio   
					track   
					* No indicator appears in the front panel display when   
					you play a tape without Hi-fi recording.   
					How sound is recorded on a video tape   
					The VCR records sound onto two separate tracks.   
					Hi-fi audio is recorded onto the main track along   
					with the picture. Monaural sound is recorded onto   
					the normal audio track along the edge of the tape.   
					Monaural sound   
					Normal audio track   
					Hi-fi audio track   
					(main track)   
					Stereo sound   
					(left/right channels)   
					74   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Notes   
					• Tapes recorded in EP (×3) mode by this VCR cannot be   
					played back on VHS video decks with SP mode only.   
					• Noise may appear in the image when tapes recorded in   
					EP (×3) mode by this VCR are played back on other   
					VHS video decks with EP mode.   
					VCR Recording   
					Before Recording   
					Before you start recording…   
					• This VCR records in VHS format, not S-VHS   
					format.   
					• Check that the tape is longer than the recording   
					
					• Check that the recorder is connected to a tuner   
					such as a cable box or satellite receiver   
					(page 12). See also the tuner’s instruction   
					manual.   
					Notes   
					• Timer recordings will start with or without the recorder   
					turned on. Once started, the recorder cannot be turned   
					off. The recorder automatically turns off after a   
					recording has finished.   
					• This recorder has the copy guard function. Programs   
					that contain a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be   
					correctly recorded on the VCR.   
					To save a recording   
					To prevent accidental erasure, break off the safety   
					tab as illustrated. To record on the tape again,   
					cover the tab hole with adhesive tape.   
					Safety tab   
					Recording mode   
					“EP” (Extended Play) and “SP” (Standard Play) is   
					available for recording mode (tape speed). “EP”   
					provides recording time three times as long as   
					“SP.” However, “SP” produces better picture and   
					audio quality.   
					Maximum recording time   
					Tape Length   
					T-120   
					SP   
					EP   
					2 hrs   
					6 hrs   
					8 hrs   
					9 hrs   
					T-160   
					2 hrs 40 mins   
					3 hrs   
					T-180   
					75   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				(LINE1 or LINE2) by pressing INPUT, and   
					then select the channel on the cable box/   
					satellite receiver’s side.   
					VCR Recording From   
					Connected Equipment   
					Without the Timer   
					5 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”   
					For details about the recording mode, see   
					
					6 Press z REC.   
					You can record TV programs on the recorder   
					through the connected cable box/satellite receiver.   
					“REC” appears in the front panel display, and   
					recording starts.   
					Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned   
					on and do not change the channel you are   
					recording.   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					CH +/–   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					INPUT   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP.   
					DISPLAY   
					To pause recording   
					Press X PAUSE.   
					To restart recording, press X PAUSE again.   
					If you pause recording for more than five minutes,   
					recording stops automatically.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					z REC   
					To watch a DVD while recording   
					Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder, insert a   
					disc, and press H PLAY.   
					z Hints   
					• Tape information displayed on the TV screen will not   
					be recorded on the tape.   
					• You can turn off the TV during recording.   
					1 Turn on the recorder and the connected   
					cable box/satellite receiver.   
					Notes   
					• You cannot change the recording mode or input source   
					while recording.   
					• If you insert a tape with its safety tab removed, the tape   
					is ejected when you press z REC.   
					2 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					3 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.   
					Recording using the Quick Timer   
					(One-touch Timer Recording)   
					You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute   
					increments.   
					4 Press CH +/– or INPUT repeatedly to select   
					the channel or input source you want to   
					record.   
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					• When using the cable box/satellite receiver   
					control, select the channel by pressing   
					CH +/– on this recorder’s remote. The   
					recorder’s input is switched to the connected   
					input (LINE1 or LINE2). You can also use   
					the number buttons.   
					2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the   
					duration.   
					Each press increases the time by 30 minutes,   
					up to six hours.   
					(Normal   
					recording)   
					0:30   
					1:00   
					5:30 6:00   
					• When not using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the connected input   
					76   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				“c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining   
					recording time appears in the front panel   
					display.   
					When the time counter reaches “0:00,” the   
					recorder stops recording and turns off.   
					Notes   
					• The remaining tape length may not be indicated   
					accurately for short tapes such as T-20 or T-30, or tapes   
					recorded in LP mode.   
					• After DISPLAY is pressed, it may take one minute for   
					the remaining tape length to appear.   
					To cancel the Quick Timer   
					Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears   
					in the front panel display. The recorder returns to   
					normal recording mode.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					Checking the remaining tape length   
					You can check recording information, such as   
					remaining tape length or recording mode, etc.   
					Press DISPLAY while recording.   
					The information display appears.   
					Press the button repeatedly to change the display   
					
					Record   
					0:30:00   
					SP   
					Rem 01:30   
					Line1   
					A Recording status   
					B Time counter   
					C Recording mode   
					D Remaining tape length   
					E Input source   
					To check the remaining tape length, set “VCR   
					Function” – “Tape Length” of “Features” in the   
					
					z Hint   
					You can view the information also in the front panel   
					display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the   
					display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during   
					One-touch Timer Recording.   
					77   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				3 Press TIMER.   
					VCR Timer Recording From   
					Connected Equipment   
					Timer – Standard   
					10:10 AM   
					No Rec To   
					No.01   
					01  
					Dae   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					02 Media Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Ch   
					Mode   
					03  
					VCR   
					Today   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Line1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					04  
					05  
					06  
					You can set the timer for a total of 12 programs   
					together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up   
					to one month in advance.   
					If you record from connected equipment that has a   
					timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec   
					
					1 
					2 
					3 
					4 
					5 
					6 
					4 Select an item using </, and adjust   
					using M/m.   
					Note   
					Do not operate your cable box or satellite receiver just   
					before or during a timer recording. This may prevent the   
					accurate recording of a program.   
					A “Media”: Select “VCR.”   
					B “Date”: Sets the date using M.   
					To record the same program every day or   
					the same day every week, press m.   
					The item changes as follows:   
					VIDEO   
					Today y Sun-Sat (Sunday to Saturday)   
					y Mon-Sat (Monday to Saturday) y   
					Mon-Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun   
					(every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday)   
					y … y Sat (every Saturday) y   
					1 month later y … y Today   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TIMER   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					C “Start”: Sets the start time.   
					D “End”: Sets the stop time.   
					E “Ch”: Selects the channel or input   
					source.   
					x STOP   
					• When using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the channel.   
					• When not using the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control, select the input, LINE1   
					or LINE2. Select the channel on the   
					connected cable box/satellite receiver’s   
					side before the timer recording starts.   
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.   
					F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode;   
					“SP” or “EP.” To use the Rec Mode   
					
					“AUTO.”   
					If you make a mistake, select the item and   
					change the setting.   
					5 Press ENTER.   
					
					c indicator lights up in the front panel   
					display, and the recorder is ready to start   
					recording.   
					78   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				• If the c indicator flashes in the front panel   
					display, check that a tape with its safety tab   
					in place is inserted.   
					• If timer settings overlap, a message appears.   
					To change or cancel a timer recording, select   
					
					“Tape Length” of “Features” in the “Setup”   
					
					z Hints   
					• When the start time and the channel or input source to   
					be recorded are the same but the “Media” setting   
					differs, the program is recorded to both the DVD disc   
					and the VHS tape.   
					• You can also turn on the Timer programming menu   
					from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to   
					select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”   
					6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.   
					There is no need to turn off the recorder before   
					the timer recording starts.   
					Leave the cable box/satellite receiver turned   
					on and do not change the channel selected on   
					the cable box/satellite receiver until the   
					recorder finishes the timer recording.   
					Notes   
					• Even when correctly set, the program may not be   
					recorded if another recording is underway, or other   
					prioritized timer setting overlaps.   
					• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab   
					removed.   
					• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”   
					flashes in the front panel display.   
					• The recorder automatically turns off when a timer   
					recording finishes, even if the recording started with   
					the recorder turned on.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					If timer settings overlap   
					The program that starts first has priority and the   
					second program starts recording only after the first   
					program has finished. If the programs start at the   
					same time, the program listed first in the menu has   
					priority. If the end time of one setting and the start   
					time of another timer setting is the same, the   
					beginning of the program that starts later will be   
					cut.   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					will be cut off   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					will be cut off   
					To change or cancel timer recording   
					
					
					To use the Rec Mode Adjust function   
					If the remaining tape length is too short for the   
					current recording, the VCR automatically changes   
					the recording mode from SP to EP.   
					When setting the timer, select “AUTO” in   
					“Mode,” and check that the “Tape Length” setting   
					is correct for the inserted tape (“VCR Function” -   
					79   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				8 Select “to VIDEO,” and press ENTER.   
					Recording From Connected   
					Equipment With a Timer   
					(Synchro Rec)   
					9 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.   
					10 Set the timer on the connected equipment   
					to the time of the program you want to   
					record, and turn it off.   
					11 Press SYNCHRO REC.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on   
					the front panel and the recorder stands by for   
					Synchro-Rec.   
					You can set the recorder to automatically record   
					programs from connected equipment that has a   
					timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect   
					the equipment to the LINE 1 IN jacks on the rear   
					
					When the connected equipment turns on, the   
					recorder starts recording a program from the LINE   
					1 IN jacks.   
					The recorder starts recording when a signal is   
					received from the connected equipment.   
					When the connected equipment turns off, the   
					recording stops and the recorder turns off.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x STOP twice.   
					VIDEO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					To cancel Synchro-Rec function   
					Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder   
					turns off.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-   
					Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC   
					indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording   
					and another timer recording overlap   
					x STOP   
					Regardless of whether or not the program is a   
					Synchro-Rec program, the program that starts first   
					has priority and the second program starts   
					recording only after the first program has finished.   
					If the end time of one setting and the start time of   
					another timer setting is the same, the beginning of   
					the program that starts later will be cut.   
					REC MODE   
					SYNCHRO   
					REC   
					7:00   
					8:00   
					9:00   
					10:00   
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					Program 1   
					Program 2   
					2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.   
					3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”   
					will be cut off   
					4 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					5 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					6 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Features” setup appears.   
					7 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					80   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Notes   
					Changing or Canceling VCR   
					Timer Settings (Timer List)   
					• The recorder starts recording only after detecting the   
					video signal from the connected equipment. The   
					beginning of the program may not be recorded   
					regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on   
					or off.   
					• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec   
					standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing   
					SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be   
					sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO   
					REC, before Synchro-Rec starts.   
					You can change or cancel timer settings using the   
					Timer List menu.   
					• The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some   
					tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating   
					instructions.   
					• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the   
					Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC   
					indicator turns off.   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab   
					removed.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the   
					recorder will turn off when the recording ends.   
					O RETURN   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					The System Menu appears.   
					2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER.   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					No. Media   
					Date   
					04/15   
					04/30   
					Start   
					End   
					Ch   
					Mode Edit   
					01 VCR   
					02 VCR   
					09:00PM   
					09:15PM   
					10:00PM   
					09:45PM   
					Line1   
					Line1   
					SP   
					SP   
					03 ---   
					04 ---   
					05 ---   
					06 ---   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					Timer information displays the recording   
					date, time, recording mode, etc.   
					If there are more than six timer settings, press   
					m to display the next page.   
					,continued   
					81   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording   
					currently underway.   
					• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and   
					VCR timer settings.   
					4 Select the timer setting you want to change   
					or cancel, and press ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					No. Media   
					Date   
					04/15   
					04/30   
					Start   
					End   
					Ch   
					Mode Edit   
					Edit   
					01 VCR   
					02 VCR   
					09:00PM   
					09:15PM   
					10:00PM   
					09:45PM   
					Line1   
					Line1   
					E 
					rase   
					03 ---   
					04 ---   
					05 ---   
					06 ---   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--/--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					--:--   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					----   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					---   
					5 Select one of the options, and press   
					ENTER.   
					“Edit”: Changes the timer setting.   
					Select an item using </, and adjust using   
					M/m. Press ENTER.   
					Timer – Standard   
					10:10 AM   
					No Rec To   
					Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					No.01   
					01  
					02Media Date   
					StartEndCh   
					Mode   
					03  
					VCR   
					04/15   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Line1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					04  
					05  
					06  
					“Erase”: Erases the timer setting.   
					Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked   
					for confirmation.   
					Timer List   
					10:10 AM   
					No Rec To   
					Date   
					Start   
					End   
					Source Mode Edit   
					01  
					02  
					Do you want to erase “No.01”?   
					03  
					04  
					05  
					06  
					OK   
					Cancel   
					6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer   
					List.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					Notes   
					• Even when correctly set, the program may not be   
					recorded if another recording is underway, or other   
					prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see   
					
					82   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Notes   
					Recording From Another   
					VCR or Similar Device   
					• A video game image may not be recorded clearly.   
					• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab   
					removed.   
					• During recording or recording pause, you cannot   
					change the recording mode.   
					• You cannot change the input source during recording.   
					You can record from a connected VCR or similar   
					device. For connection details, see “Connecting   
					
					VIDEO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					INPUT   
					x STOP   
					z REC   
					REC MODE   
					1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.   
					3 Press INPUT repeatedly to select the input   
					source (LINE1 or LINE2) according to the   
					connection you made.   
					4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode, “SP” or “EP.”   
					5 Insert the source tape into the connected   
					equipment and set to playback pause.   
					6 Press z REC on this recorder and the   
					pause or play button on the connected   
					equipment at the same time.   
					Recording starts.   
					To stop recording, press x STOP on this   
					recorder.   
					83   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				1 Press DVD and insert a recordable disc.   
					To select the recording mode, press REC   
					
					Dubbing (TAPE y DVD)   
					2 Insert a source VHS tape.   
					Dubbing From a VHS Tape to   
					a DVD   
					3 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.   
					4 Start playing the VHS tape, and then press   
					x STOP or X PAUSE at the point where   
					you want to start dubbing.   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					To select VCR sound, press AUDIO during   
					
					You can easily record (dub) a VHS tape to a disc.   
					Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings   
					on the VCR.   
					5 Press T VIDEO on the recorder.   
					Dubbing starts.   
					◆How titles and chapters are created   
					The recorder takes each recording on the VHS tape   
					and automatically divides them into titles as they   
					are dubbed to a disc. These titles are then further   
					divided into chapters at either 5 or 15-minute   
					intervals, according to the “DVD Auto Chapter”   
					setting of “Features” in the “Setup” display.   
					To stop dubbing   
					Press x STOP.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop dubbing.   
					To play discs recorded with this recorder on   
					other DVD equipment   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					AUDIO   
					
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					To dub using the on-screen menu   
					1 
					2 
					After step 4 above, press SYSTEM MENU.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and   
					press ENTER.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					H PLAY   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					x STOP   
					Edit   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					3 
					4 
					Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					VIDEO --> DVD   
					DVD --> VIDEO   
					TVIDEO   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Select “VIDEO t DVD,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					84   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				5 
					Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing starts.   
					Dubbing From a DVD to a   
					VHS Tape   
					z Hints   
					• A black (no signal) screen at the end of the dubbed disc   
					is not a malfunction. This screen is recorded if a time   
					discrepancy exists between the disc and tape when the   
					recording is stopped.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					DVD RAM   
					• When dubbing a VHS tape to a DVD, the VHS tape   
					counter value may differ slightly from the DVD   
					recording time.   
					You can record (dub) a DVD title to a VHS tape.   
					Note that when you record copy-protected   
					software to a tape, picture may appear disrupted   
					when you play back the tape.   
					• VCR playback sound is output during dubbing.   
					You can also select titles or scenes and dub them   
					all at once. See “Dubbing selected titles and scenes   
					
					Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings   
					on the DVD recorder.   
					Notes   
					• Dubbing cannot be made when:   
					– using a non-recordable DVD.   
					– using VHS software with copy guard functions.   
					• Dubbing stops when:   
					– the VHS tape reaches the end and stops.   
					– the VHS video deck or the DVD deck is stopped.   
					– the disc remaining time runs out.   
					• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information   
					display are not displayed during dubbing.   
					• Copyrights   
					– Recordings made from VHS tapes and other   
					copyrighted material are solely for individual   
					enjoyment, and other unauthorized use is prohibited   
					under copyright law.   
					– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is   
					prohibited under copyright law.   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					SUBTITLE   
					AUDIO   
					TOP MENU   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TITLE LIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					./>   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					DVDt   
					1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its   
					safety tab in place.   
					To select the recording mode, SP or EP, press   
					
					,continued   
					85   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				dubbing. Otherwise the disc’s menu is   
					recorded until the tape reaches its end.   
					2 Insert a source disc.   
					3 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					4 Press TOP MENU or TITLE LIST to select a   
					z Hints   
					title.   
					• The brightness of the playback picture may differ from   
					normal DVD playback picture.   
					• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the   
					VHS tape counter value.   
					• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the   
					dubbed sound.   
					5 Start playing the DVD, and then press x   
					STOP or X PAUSE at the point where you   
					want to start dubbing.   
					To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle,   
					press AUDIO or SUBTITLE during playback   
					
					Notes   
					• Dubbing stops when:   
					6 Press DVD t on the recorder.   
					– the DVD is played back to the end and stops.   
					– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped.   
					– the tape remaining time runs out.   
					Dubbing starts.   
					• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information   
					display are not displayed during dubbing.   
					• Copyrights   
					To stop dubbing   
					Press x STOP.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop dubbing.   
					– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted   
					material are solely for individual enjoyment, and   
					other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright   
					law.   
					– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is   
					prohibited under copyright law.   
					To dub using the on-screen menu   
					1 
					2 
					After step 5 above, press SYSTEM MENU.   
					Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and   
					press ENTER.   
					Dubbing selected titles and scenes   
					(Program Dubbing)   
					You can select titles or scenes from a DVD, and   
					dub the contents to a VHS tape all at once.   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					Edit   
					1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					safety tab in place.   
					To select the recording mode, SP or EP, press   
					
					2 Press DVD and insert a source disc.   
					To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle,   
					press AUDIO or SUBTITLE during playback   
					
					3 
					Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					VIDEO --> DVD   
					DVD --> VIDEO   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					3 Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					The System Menu appears.   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					4 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					4 
					5 
					Select “DVD t VIDEO,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing starts.   
					If the disc’s menu appears when DVD   
					playback finishes, press x STOP to stop   
					86   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				5 Select “Program Dubbing,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					9 Press ENTER at the start point.   
					You can use H PLAY,   
					, 
					./>, x STOP, and X PAUSE to find   
					the point.   
					Program Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					“End” is selected.   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Create Dubbing List   
					Program Dubbing List   
					Scene Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Edit   
					Scene No.01   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Start   
					End   
					Start 00:00:10   
					Make   
					Finish   
					00:00:10   
					T 
					Dubbing List No. 01   
					---/--/---- --:--   
					End 00:00:00   
					6 Select “Create Dubbing List,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					If you have performed Program Dubbing   
					before, the display asks for confirmation. To   
					continue, select “Yes” and press ENTER.   
					The display for selecting titles appears.   
					10 Press ENTER at the end point.   
					“Make” is selected.   
					To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or   
					“End” and repeat from step 9 or 10.   
					Create Dubbing List   
					1/2 No. Title   
					10:10 AM   
					11 Press ENTER.   
					Length Edit   
					To continue, repeat from step 9.   
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					00:05:04   
					00:00:51   
					> 
					> 
					12 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.   
					The Program Dubbing List appears with the   
					selected scene.   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					May/02/2007   
					03:25 PM   
					Program Dubbing List   
					10:10 AM   
					No. Title   
					Length Edit   
					00:05:04   
					01 LINE 1   
					> 
					Addition   
					Erase   
					7 Select the title you want to dub, and press   
					ENTER.   
					The sub-menu appears.   
					Check   
					T 
					LINE   
					1 
					To dub the entire title, select “Title Dubbing”   
					and press ENTER. The Program Dubbing List   
					appears with the selected title. Go to step 13.   
					To select a scene to dub, go to step 8.   
					May/02/2007   
					03:25 PM   
					Dubbing   
					13 Select an option and press ENTER, if   
					necessary.   
					8 Select “Scene Dubbing,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					To add other titles or scenes, select “Addition”   
					and press ENTER, and repeat from step 7.   
					To cancel the selected title or scene, select   
					“Erase” and press ENTER. When asked for   
					confirmation, select “OK” and press ENTER.   
					To view the selected title or scene, select   
					“Check” and press ENTER.   
					The display for setting a scene appears.   
					“Start” is selected.   
					Scene Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Scene No.01   
					Start   
					End   
					To cancel dubbing, press O RETURN.   
					Start 00:00:00   
					14 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.   
					Make   
					Finish   
					00:00:07   
					Dubbing starts.   
					T 
					Dubbing List No. 01   
					---/--/---- --:--   
					End 00:00:00   
					,continued   
					87   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				To stop dubbing   
					Press x STOP.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop dubbing.   
					Finalizing a Disc (Preparing   
					a Disc for Playback on   
					Other Equipment)   
					z Hints   
					• The brightness of the playback picture may differ from   
					normal DVD playback picture.   
					• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the   
					VHS tape counter value.   
					• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the   
					dubbed sound.   
					+ 
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					R 
					Finalizing is necessary in order to play discs   
					recorded with this recorder on other DVD   
					equipment.   
					When you finalize a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video   
					mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), a DVD   
					menu will be automatically created, which can be   
					displayed on other DVD equipment.   
					Before finalizing, check the differences between   
					the disc types in the table below.   
					Notes   
					• Dubbing stops when:   
					– the DVD is played back to the end and stops.   
					– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped.   
					– the tape remaining time runs out.   
					• The System Menu, OPTIONS menu, and information   
					display are not displayed during dubbing.   
					• Copyrights   
					Differences between the disc types   
					– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted   
					material are solely for individual enjoyment, and   
					other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright   
					law.   
					– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is   
					prohibited under copyright law.   
					Discs are automatically finalized when   
					removed from the recorder. If you want   
					to record on it again, reformat the disc   
					(page 67). Note however, that   
					reformatting a disc erases all its   
					contents.   
					+ 
					RW   
					• Once you eject the disc, the Program Dubbing List is   
					erased.   
					Finalizing is unnecessary when playing a   
					disc on VR format compatible equipment.   
					Even if your other DVD equipment is   
					VR format compatible, you may need to   
					finalize the disc, especially if the   
					- 
					RWVR   
					recording time is short. After finalizing,   
					you cannot edit or record on the disc. If   
					you want to edit or record on it again,   
					
					Note however, that reformatting a disc   
					erases all its contents.   
					Finalizing is necessary in order to play   
					on equipment other than this recorder.   
					After finalizing, you cannot edit or   
					record on the disc. If you want to edit or   
					record on it again, unfinalize or reformat   
					
					reformatting a disc erases all its   
					contents.   
					- 
					RWVideo   
					Finalizing is necessary in order to play   
					on equipment other than this recorder.   
					The finalized discs can be played on   
					other VR mode compatible players.   
					After finalizing, you cannot further edit   
					or record on the disc.   
					- 
					RVR   
					Finalizing is necessary in order to play   
					on equipment other than this recorder.   
					After finalizing, you cannot further edit   
					or record on the disc.   
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					RVideo   
					88   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				DVD   
					Disc will be finalized.   
					Do you want to continue ?   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					OK   
					Cancel   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					The recorder starts finalizing the disc.   
					To turn off the display   
					Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					To unfinalize a DVD-RW (VR mode)   
					If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW (VR   
					mode) that has been finalized, unfinalize the disc   
					by selecting “Unfinalize” in step 6 above.   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					2 Insert a disc.   
					z Hints   
					• You can check whether the disc has been finalized or   
					not. If you cannot select “Finalize” in step 6 above, the   
					disc has already been finalized.   
					• To check the disc information, select “Disc   
					Information” in the “Disc Setting” display and press   
					
					3 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					The System Menu appears.   
					4 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Disc Setting” display appears.   
					Notes   
					Disc Setting   
					10:10 AM   
					• Depending on the condition of the disc, the recording,   
					or the DVD equipment, discs may not play even if the   
					discs are finalized.   
					• The recorder may not be able to finalize a disc if it was   
					recorded on another recorder.   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Disc Name   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					Disc Protect   
					Not Protected   
					VR Mode   
					Disc Format   
					Edit   
					Disc Finalize   
					Disc Information   
					Erase All Titles   
					Unfinalized   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					5 Select “Disc Finalize,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation.   
					Do you want to finalize this disc ?   
					Finalize   
					Unfinalize   
					6 Select “Finalize,” and press ENTER.   
					The display asks for confirmation again.   
					89   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Connecting a Digital Video   
					Camera to the DV IN Jack   
					DV/D8 Dubbing (DV/D8 t DVD)   
					Before DV/D8 Dubbing   
					You can connect a digital video camera to the DV   
					IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a   
					DV/D8 format tape. Operation is straightforward   
					because the DVD recorder will fast forward and   
					rewind the tape for you – you do not need to   
					operate your digital video camera. Do the   
					following to start using the “DV/D8 Edit”   
					functions of this recorder.   
					This section explains dubbing with a digital video   
					camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel. If   
					you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks, see   
					
					
					To record from the DV IN jack   
					See the instruction manual supplied with the   
					digital video camera as well before connecting.   
					The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the   
					i.LINK standard. You can connect any other   
					equipment that has an i.LINK (DV) jack, and   
					record digital signals.   
					Notes   
					Follow the instructions in “Connecting a Digital   
					Video Camera to the DV IN Jack,” and then move   
					on to the section on dubbing. For more   
					information about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK” on   
					
					• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not output   
					signals.   
					• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:   
					– your digital video camera does not work with this   
					recorder. Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and   
					follow the instructions of “Recording From Another   
					
					– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do not   
					connect a MICROMV format digital video camera   
					even if it has an i.LINK jack.   
					z Hint   
					If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the   
					initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW   
					(VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode). Note that erasing   
					unwanted scenes does not free up disc space for DVD-Rs   
					(VR mode).   
					– the images on the tape contain copy protection   
					signals, which limit recording.   
					Hookups   
					VCR-DVD recorder   
					DV IN   
					to DV IN   
					i.LINK cable   
					(not supplied)   
					to DV output   
					Digital video camera   
					: Signal flow   
					90   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				3 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc   
					tray.   
					Dubbing From a DV/D8   
					Format Tape to a DVD   
					Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front   
					panel display.   
					Unused discs are automatically formatted. For   
					the DVD-RW/DVD-R’s recording format   
					(VR mode or Video mode), see “Formatting a   
					
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					You can record a DV/D8 format tape onto a disc.   
					The recorder controls the digital video camera.   
					You can fast forward, rewind, play in slow motion,   
					and stop the tape to select the scenes using the on-   
					screen menu.   
					4 Insert the source DV/D8 format tape into   
					your digital video camera.   
					For the recorder to record or edit, your digital   
					video camera must be set to video playback   
					mode.   
					To simply dub the entire contents of a DV/D8   
					
					◆How titles and chapters are created   
					The dubbed contents on the disc become one title,   
					and the title is then divided into chapters at either   
					5 or 15-minute intervals, according to the “DVD   
					Auto Chapter” setting of “Features” in the “Setup”   
					display.   
					5 Press INPUT repeatedly to select “DV.”   
					6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the   
					recording mode.   
					For details about the recording mode, see   
					
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					DVD   
					7 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					The System Menu appears.   
					INPUT   
					8 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					Setup   
					No Disc   
					10:10 AM   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					Title List   
					Clock Set   
					Video   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Timer   
					Audio   
					Edit   
					O RETURN   
					Features   
					Options   
					Easy Setup   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					REC MODE   
					9 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.   
					Audio   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Digital Out   
					Downmix   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					Dolby Surround   
					Timer   
					Audio DRC   
					Standard   
					Auto   
					Edit   
					Audio (HDMI)   
					Scan Audio   
					Surround   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.   
					On   
					Off   
					2 Press Z OPEN/CLOSE, and place a   
					DV/D8 Audio Input   
					Line Audio Input   
					Stereo 1   
					Stereo   
					recordable disc on the disc tray.   
					Recording side facing down   
					,continued   
					91   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				10 Select “DV/D8 Audio Input,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					DV Tape Mode   
					Audio   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Digital Out   
					Downmix   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					Dolby Surround   
					Timer   
					Audio DRC   
					Standard   
					Auto   
					On   
					Edit   
					Audio (HDMI)   
					Scan Audio   
					Surround   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					If “DV” or “DV Camera Mode” is displayed   
					instead of “DV Tape Mode,” check that the   
					digital video camera is correctly connected   
					and its power turned on, and that its mode is   
					set for dubbing.   
					Stereo 1   
					DV/D8 Audio Input   
					Line Audio Input   
					Stereo 2   
					Mix   
					“Stereo 1”: Records original sound only.   
					Normally select this when dubbing a DV   
					format tape.   
					“Stereo 2”: Records additional audio only.   
					“Mix”: Records original and additional   
					sounds.   
					Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added   
					a second audio channel when recording with   
					your digital video camera. For the details, see   
					
					16 Find the dubbing start point on the tape,   
					and stop or pause playback.   
					Press </, to select m, x, X, y, H, or   
					M on the TV screen and press ENTER to   
					find the point, and stop or pause with x or X.   
					17 Press , to select z on the TV screen, and   
					press ENTER.   
					Dubbing starts.   
					11 Select an option, and press ENTER.   
					12 Press O RETURN twice.   
					To stop recording   
					Select x on the TV screen, and press ENTER.   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop recording.   
					13 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Simple Dubbing   
					To turn off the display for DV/D8 dubbing   
					Press INPUT.   
					Program Dubbing   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					z Hint   
					If “DV Camera Mode” appears on the screen, you can use   
					z on the TV screen to record the camera image directly   
					on the recorder.   
					Notes   
					14 Select “DV/D8 Dubbing,” and press   
					ENTER.   
					• If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment,   
					
					• You cannot connect more than one piece of digital   
					video equipment to the recorder.   
					• You cannot record the date, time, or contents of a DV/   
					D8 format tape onto the disc.   
					DV/D8 Dubbing   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					DV/D8 Simple Dubbing   
					DV/D8 One Touch Dubbing   
					Edit   
					• If you record from a DV/D8 format tape with a   
					soundtrack that is recorded in multiple sampling   
					frequencies (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound,   
					or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back   
					the sampling frequency switch point on the disc.   
					• The recorded picture may be momentarily affected if   
					the picture size of the source image changes, or if there   
					is nothing recorded on the tape.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					15 Select “DV/D8 Simple Dubbing,” and   
					press ENTER.   
					• Noise may occur when you switch the audio sampling   
					mode (48 kHz/16 bits t 32 kHz/12 bits).   
					The following display appears.   
					92   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Dubbing an entire DV/D8 format tape   
					to a DVD (One Touch Dubbing)   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					You can record the entire contents of a DV/D8   
					format tape onto a disc with a single press of the   
					ONE-TOUCH DUBBING button. The recorder   
					controls the digital video camera for the whole   
					process, and completes the recording.   
					ONE-TOUCH DUBBING   
					x 
					
					
					and press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the   
					display.   
					2 Press ONE-TOUCH DUBBING on the   
					recorder.   
					The recorder rewinds the tape in the digital   
					video camera and then starts recording the   
					tape contents from the beginning.   
					When playback of the tape stops, One Touch   
					Dubbing ends automatically.   
					To stop recording   
					Press x (stop).   
					Note that it may take a few seconds for the   
					recorder to stop recording.   
					z Hint   
					You can also perform One Touch Dubbing when you   
					select “DV/D8 One Touch Dubbing” and press ENTER   
					in step 15 of “Dubbing From a DV/D8 Format Tape to a   
					DVD” on page 91. Follow the instructions appearing on   
					the TV screen.   
					93   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Setup” display appears.   
					Settings and Adjustments   
					Setup   
					No Disc   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Clock Set   
					Video   
					Using the Setup Displays   
					Timer   
					Audio   
					Edit   
					By using the setup displays, you can make various   
					adjustments to items such as picture and sound, as   
					well as select a language for the subtitles.   
					Features   
					Options   
					Easy Setup   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					The setup displays are used in the following way.   
					Note   
					3 Select “Clock Set,” “Video,” “Audio,”   
					“Features,” “Options,” or “Easy Setup,”   
					and press ENTER.   
					Playback settings stored on the disc take priority over the   
					setup display settings, and not all of the functions   
					described may work.   
					The selected setup display appears.   
					Example: “Video” setup   
					Video   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					TV Type   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					4:3 Letter Box   
					Auto   
					HDMI Resolution   
					Video (HDMI)   
					Black Level   
					Timer   
					Y Cb Cr   
					On   
					Edit   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Picture Control   
					Progressive   
					Standard   
					Off   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					O RETURN   
					4 Select the item you want to set up, and   
					press ENTER.   
					Available options for the item appear.   
					Example: “TV Type”   
					Video   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					TV Type   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					16:9   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					4:3 Letter Box   
					HDMI Resolution   
					Video (HDMI)   
					Black Level   
					Timer   
					4:3 Pan Scan   
					The System Menu appears.   
					Edit   
					On   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Picture Control   
					Progressive   
					Standard   
					Off   
					Title List (Original)   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Press ENTER :   
					Timer   
					Edit   
					Title Menu for DVD Title List.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					94   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Some items display a dialog box that requires   
					additional settings.   
					Example: When “Parental” in “Options”   
					setup is selected.   
					Clock Setting (Clock Set)   
					The “Clock Set” setup allows you to make clock   
					settings for the recorder.   
					Create the password   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					Timer   
					Create the password.   
					Edit   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					3 Select “Clock Set,” and press ENTER.   
					The clock setting display appears.   
					Clock Set   
					10:10 AM   
					5 Select an option, and press ENTER.   
					The currently selected option is displayed   
					next to the setup item.   
					Title List   
					Set the time and date manually.   
					Month Day   
					Year   
					Timer   
					01   
					01   
					2007   
					Mon   
					Edit   
					Example: When “16:9” is set.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Hour Min AM/PM   
					10 10 AM   
					Video   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					: 
					TV Type   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					16:9   
					HDMI Resolution   
					Video (HDMI)   
					Black Level   
					Auto   
					Timer   
					Y Cb Cr   
					On   
					Edit   
					4 Press M/m to set the month, and press ,.   
					Set the day, year, hour, minutes, and AM/PM   
					in sequence. Press </, to select the item to   
					be set, then press M/m to set the item. The day   
					of the week is set automatically.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Picture Control   
					Progressive   
					Standard   
					Off   
					5 Press ENTER to start the clock.   
					To return to the previous display   
					Press O RETURN.   
					To turn off the display   
					Press SYSTEM MENU.   
					95   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				16:9   
					Video Settings (Video)   
					The “Video” setup allows you to adjust items   
					related to the image, such as size and color.   
					Choose the settings according to the type of TV,   
					tuner, or decoder connected to the recorder.   
					4:3 Letter Box   
					4:3 Pan Scan   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Video,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Video” setup appears with the following   
					options. The default settings are underlined.   
					Note   
					Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be selected   
					automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or vice versa.   
					Video   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					TV Type   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					4:3 Letter Box   
					Auto   
					HDMI Resolution   
					Video (HDMI)   
					Black Level   
					Timer   
					HDMI Resolution   
					Y Cb Cr   
					On   
					Selects the type of video signals output from the   
					HDMI OUT jack. When you select “Auto”   
					(default), the recorder outputs video signals of the   
					highest resolution acceptable for your TV. If the   
					picture is not clear, unnatural or not to your   
					satisfaction, try another option that suits the disc   
					and your TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also   
					to the instruction manual supplied with the TV/   
					projector, etc.   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Picture Control   
					Progressive   
					Standard   
					Off   
					TV Type   
					Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3   
					standard or wide).   
					The setting is effective only when you connect a   
					HDMI equipped TV to the HDMI OUT jack.   
					16:9   
					Select this when connecting to a   
					wide-screen TV or TV with a   
					wide mode function.   
					Auto   
					Normally, select this.   
					1920×1080i   
					1280×720P   
					720×480P   
					Sends 1920×1080i video signals.   
					Sends 1280×720p video signals.   
					Sends 720×480p video signals.   
					4:3 Letter   
					Box   
					Select this when connecting to a   
					4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide   
					picture with bands on the upper   
					and lower portions of the screen.   
					Video (HDMI)   
					Selects the type of output from the HDMI OUT   
					jack.   
					The setting is effective only when you connect a   
					HDMI equipped TV to the HDMI OUT jack.   
					4:3 Pan   
					Scan   
					Select this when connecting to a   
					4:3 screen TV. Automatically   
					displays a wide picture on the   
					entire screen and cuts off the   
					portions that do not fit.   
					Y Cb Cr   
					Normally, select this when   
					connecting to an HDMI device.   
					RGB   
					Gives brighter colors and deeper   
					black. Select this if colors are   
					weak.   
					96   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Black Level   
					On   
					Off   
					Sets the recorder to output   
					progressive signals.   
					Selects the black level (setup level) for the video   
					signals output from the LINE OUT jacks   
					
					This setting is not effective when the recorder   
					outputs progressive signals.   
					Outputs video signals in interlace   
					format.   
					Notes   
					On   
					Raises the standard black level.   
					Select this when the picture   
					appears too dark.   
					• If you select progressive signals when you connect the   
					recorder to a TV that cannot accept the signal in   
					progressive format, the image quality will deteriorate.   
					In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off.” Or, press DVD   
					in stop mode to operate the DVD recorder, and then   
					hold down X PAUSE on the recorder for five seconds   
					or more.   
					Off   
					Sets the black level of the output   
					signal to the standard level.   
					Picture Control   
					• When you connect your TV using an HDMI cable, the   
					“Progressive” setting is set to “On.”   
					Selects the picture control for the video signals   
					
					You can adjust the video signal of DVD or   
					VIDEO CD (with PBC function off) from the   
					recorder to obtain the picture quality you want.   
					Select the setting that best suits the program you   
					are watching.   
					Dynamic 1   
					Produces a bold dynamic picture   
					by increasing the picture contrast   
					and the color intensity.   
					Dynamic 2   
					Produces a more dynamic picture   
					than “Dynamic 1” by further   
					increasing the picture contrast   
					and the color intensity.   
					Standard   
					Cinema 1   
					Displays a standard picture   
					(function turned off).   
					White colors become brighter   
					and black colors become richer,   
					and the color contrast is   
					increased.   
					Cinema 2   
					Personal   
					Enhances details in dark areas by   
					increasing the black level.   
					Adjusts “Contrast,” “Brightness,”   
					“Color,” and “Hue” using M/m/   
					</,.   
					z Hint   
					When you watch a movie, “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2” is   
					recommended.   
					Progressive   
					If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format   
					signals, you will enjoy accurate color reproduction   
					and high quality image.   
					Connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO   
					
					97   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				◆ Dolby Digital (DVDs only)   
					Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.   
					Audio Settings (Audio)   
					D-PCM   
					Select this when the recorder   
					is connected to an audio   
					component lacking a built-in   
					Dolby Digital decoder. You   
					can select whether the   
					The “Audio” setup allows you to adjust the sound   
					according to the playback and connection   
					conditions.   
					signals conform to Dolby   
					Surround or not by making   
					adjustments to the   
					“Downmix” item in “Audio”   
					
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Audio” setup appears with the following   
					options. The default settings are underlined.   
					Dolby   
					Digital   
					Select this when the recorder   
					is connected to an audio   
					component with a built-in   
					Dolby Digital decoder.   
					Audio   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Digital Out   
					Note   
					Downmix   
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					: 
					Dolby Surround   
					Timer   
					If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not   
					compatible with Dolby Digital signals, D-PCM signals   
					will be automatically output, even when “Dolby Digital”   
					is selected.   
					Audio DRC   
					Standard   
					Auto   
					Edit   
					Audio (HDMI)   
					Scan Audio   
					Surround   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					On   
					Off   
					DV/D8 Audio Input   
					Line Audio Input   
					Stereo 1   
					Stereo   
					◆ DTS (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Selects whether or not to output DTS signals.   
					On   
					Select this when the recorder   
					is connected to an audio   
					component with a built-in   
					DTS decoder.   
					Digital Out   
					The following setup items switch the method of   
					outputting audio signals when you connect a   
					component such as an amplifier (receiver) to the   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or   
					COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack.   
					Off   
					Select this when the recorder   
					is connected to an audio   
					component without a built-in   
					DTS decoder.   
					For connection details, see “Connecting to Your   
					
					Press ENTER, and select “Dolby Digital” or   
					“DTS.”   
					Note   
					Digital Out   
					10:10 AM   
					If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not   
					compatible with DTS signals, no signal will be output,   
					regardless of the “DTS” setting.   
					Title List   
					Dolby Digital   
					DTS   
					: 
					D-PCM 
					Dolby Digital   
					Timer   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					If you connect a component that does not accept   
					the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no   
					sound) will come out from the speakers, and may   
					affect your ears or cause speaker damage.   
					98   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Downmix (DVDs only)   
					Audio (HDMI) (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Selects the output method from the HDMI OUT   
					jack.   
					Switches the method for mixing down to two   
					channels when you play a DVD which has rear   
					sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby   
					Digital format. For details on the rear signal   
					
					jacks” on page 19. This function affects the output   
					of the following jacks:   
					Auto   
					Normally, select this.   
					Outputs audio signals   
					according to the “Dolby   
					Digital” or “DTS” settings   
					
					– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks   
					– AUDIO OUT L/R jacks   
					PCM   
					Converts Dolby Digital or   
					DTS to PCM.   
					– DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or   
					COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack when “Dolby   
					
					Scan Audio (DVDs only)   
					Dolby   
					Surround   
					Normally select this   
					position.   
					Multi-channel audio signals   
					are output to two channels   
					for enjoying surround   
					sounds.   
					On   
					Outputs audio signals during   
					FF1 fast-forward of a DVD   
					disc with Dolby Digital   
					soundtracks.   
					Off   
					No sound is output during   
					FF1 fast-forward.   
					Normal   
					Multi-channel audio signals   
					are downmixed to two   
					channels for use with your   
					stereo.   
					Note   
					Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio.   
					To enjoy the surround effect of Dolby Digital, turn   
					off the surround settings of this recorder   
					
					Surround   
					Turns on the surround function to create virtual   
					rear speakers from a stereo TV or two separate   
					
					Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs   
					only)   
					Off   
					No surround effect   
					Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned   
					down when playing a DVD that conforms to   
					“Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the   
					following jacks:   
					– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks   
					– AUDIO OUT L/R jacks   
					– DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or   
					COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT jack only when   
					
					Surround1   
					Creates one set of virtual   
					surround speakers   
					Surround2   
					Surround3   
					Creates two sets of virtual   
					surround speakers   
					Creates three sets of virtual   
					surround speakers   
					Standard   
					Normally select this   
					position.   
					Notes   
					• When the playback signal does not contain a signal for   
					the surround speakers, the surround effects will be   
					difficult to hear.   
					• When you select one of the surround modes, turn off   
					the surround settings of the connected TV or amplifier   
					(receiver).   
					TV Mode   
					Makes low sounds clear   
					even if you turn the volume   
					down.   
					Wide   
					Gives you the feeling of   
					Range   
					being at a live performance.   
					,continued   
					99   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				DV/D8 Audio Input   
					Recording, Set Top Box   
					Control, and VCR Settings   
					(Features)   
					Stereo 1   
					Records original sound only.   
					Normally select this when   
					dubbing a DV format tape.   
					Stereo 2   
					Mix   
					Records additional audio   
					only.   
					The “Features” setup allows you to make various   
					settings for recording, playback, and the set top   
					box control function.   
					Records both original and   
					additional sounds.   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					Note   
					Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added a second   
					audio channel when recording with your digital video   
					camera.   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Features” setup appears with the   
					following options. The default settings are   
					underlined.   
					Line Audio Input   
					When recording from equipment connected to the   
					LINE 1 IN or LINE 2 IN jacks to a DVD disc in   
					this recorder, select line input audio.   
					Features   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Stereo   
					Records stereo sound only.   
					DVD Auto Chapter   
					: 
					: 
					5 Min   
					VR   
					Format DVD-RW   
					VCR Function   
					Main/Sub   
					Records the two different   
					soundtracks on DVD-RWs   
					(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR   
					mode). You can select either   
					soundtrack when playing   
					back the disc.   
					Edit   
					Synchro Recording   
					Set Top Box Control   
					: 
					to DVD   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					z Hint   
					When recording on a disc other than DVD-RWs (VR   
					mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode), select either sound track   
					with the connected equipment before recording.   
					DVD Auto Chapter   
					Automatically divides a recording (a title) into   
					chapters by inserting chapter markings at   
					specified intervals. The markings are inserted   
					while the recording is being made.   
					Off   
					No chapter mark is inserted.   
					5 Min   
					Inserts chapter marks at   
					approximately 5 minute   
					intervals.   
					15 Min   
					Inserts chapter marks at   
					approximately 15 minute   
					intervals.   
					Note   
					Actual intervals may differ depending on the size of the   
					recording. The selected setting should be regarded as an   
					approximate chapter interval.   
					100   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Format DVD-RW (DVD-RWs only)   
					Selects the recording format for an unused DVD-   
					RW, when first inserted.   
					Set Top Box Control   
					You can control your cable box/satellite receiver   
					using the supplied set top box controller. See   
					“Step 7: Easy Setup” for details. Press ENTER,   
					and select “On” or “Off.”   
					VR   
					Automatically formats the disc in   
					VR mode.   
					On   
					Turns on the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control function. See   
					
					
					
					Video   
					Automatically formats the disc in   
					Video mode.   
					VCR Function   
					Press ENTER and select “Tape Length,” “Auto   
					Play,” or “Auto Repeat.”   
					Off   
					Turns off the cable box/satellite   
					receiver control function. Select   
					this if you do not want to use the   
					supplied set top box controller.   
					◆ Tape Length   
					T120   
					T160   
					T180   
					For T-120 or shorter length tapes.   
					For T-160 length tapes.   
					When “Set Top Box Control” is set to “On,” you   
					can make the following settings. Note that when   
					you change “Set Top Box Control” to “On” or   
					“Off,” all timer recording settings will be   
					canceled.   
					For T-180 or longer length tapes.   
					◆ Auto Play   
					On   
					Starts playback automatically,   
					when you insert a tape with its   
					safety tab removed.   
					◆ Brand Code   
					
					(page 121) for the brand code for your cable box   
					or satellite receiver, and enter the code using the   
					number buttons and ENTER.   
					Off   
					Turns off the function. You need   
					to press H PLAY to start   
					playback, even if you insert a tape   
					with its safety tab removed.   
					◆ Connections   
					Selects the connection you used for your cable box   
					or satellite receiver. Select the connection from   
					“Line1” or “Line2.”   
					◆ Auto Repeat   
					◆ Ch. Digit lock   
					Allows you to select whether to fix the digits for   
					your cable box or satellite receiver.   
					On   
					Plays back a tape repeatedly. The   
					VCR rewinds the tape to the   
					beginning and restarts playback   
					automatically.   
					Off   
					Select this when your cable box or   
					satellite receiver only accepts a   
					three or more digit channel   
					Off   
					Turns off the function.   
					number. Normally select this.   
					Synchro Recording   
					Lock to   
					2 digits   
					Select this only when your cable   
					box or satellite receiver only   
					accepts a two digit channel   
					number.   
					to DVD   
					Sets the recorder to record   
					programs from connected   
					equipment that has a timer   
					function (such as a satellite tuner)   
					to a DVD disc.   
					to VIDEO   
					Sets the recorder to record   
					programs from connected   
					equipment that has a timer   
					function (such as a satellite tuner)   
					to a VHS tape.   
					,continued   
					101   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				◆ Mode for SET button   
					Select “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” if your cable box or   
					satellite receiver requires pressing an ENTER   
					button or a SET button etc., after entering the   
					channel number. If “Mode 1” does not work, try   
					“Mode 2.” If your cable box or satellite receiver   
					does not respond to either setting, contact the   
					manufacturer of the cable box or satellite receiver.   
					Language, Parental Control   
					Settings/Factory Settings   
					(Options)   
					The “Options” setup allows you to set up other   
					operational settings.   
					Off   
					No code is sent when SET is   
					pressed. Normally select this.   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					Mode 1   
					Mode 2   
					Sends the channel number you   
					entered.   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					Sends the channel number you   
					entered.   
					3 Select “Options,” and press ENTER.   
					The “Options” setup appears with the   
					following options. The default settings are   
					underlined.   
					Options   
					10:10 AM   
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Language   
					Parental   
					Front Display   
					Command Mode   
					Factory Setting   
					: 
					: 
					Auto   
					Edit   
					DVD 3   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Language   
					◆ OSD (On-Screen Display)   
					Switches the display language on the screen.   
					◆ Disc Menu (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Switches the language for the DVD menu.   
					◆ Audio (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Switches the language of the soundtrack.   
					When you select “Original,” the language given   
					priority in the disc is selected.   
					◆ Subtitle (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on   
					the disc.   
					When you select “Auto,” the subtitle language   
					changes according to the language you selected   
					
					explanation of the language abbreviations.   
					Note   
					If you select a language in “Disc Menu,” “Subtitle,” or   
					“Audio” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of   
					the recorded languages will be automatically selected.   
					102   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				2 
					Select “Rating Level,” and press ENTER.   
					The selection items for “Rating Level” are   
					displayed.   
					Parental (DVD VIDEOs only)   
					Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited   
					according to a predetermined level, such as the age   
					of the users. Scenes may be blocked or replaced   
					with different scenes.   
					Parental   
					10:10 AM   
					Off  
					Title List   
					Timer   
					Rating Level   
					Change Password   
					: 
					1 
					After step 3 above, select “Parental,” and   
					press ENTER.   
					Level 8 (Adults)   
					Level 7   
					Edit   
					Level 6   
					• If you have not entered a password, the   
					display for registering a new password   
					appears.   
					Enter a 4-digit password using the number   
					buttons.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Level 5   
					Level 4   
					Level 3   
					Level 2   
					The lower the value, the stricter the limitation.   
					Create the password   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					3 
					Select the level, and press ENTER.   
					The Parental setting is complete.   
					Timer   
					Create the password.   
					Edit   
					• To cancel the Parental setting for the disc, set   
					“Rating Level” to “Off” in step 3.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					• To change the password, select “Change   
					Password” in step 2, and press ENTER. When   
					the display for registering a password appears,   
					enter a new four-digit password using the   
					number buttons.   
					The display for confirming the password   
					appears.   
					Re-enter the password.   
					z Hint   
					Create the password   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					If you enter a wrong number, press < or CLEAR and re-   
					enter.   
					Timer   
					Confirm the password.   
					Notes   
					Edit   
					• If you forget your password, select “Factory Setting” of   
					“Options” in the “Setup” display.   
					• Playback of discs without the Parental Control function   
					cannot be limited on this recorder.   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change the   
					Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this   
					case, enter your password, then change the level.   
					• When you have already registered a   
					password, the display for entering the   
					password appears.   
					Enter a 4-digit password using the number   
					buttons.   
					Front Display   
					Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.   
					Enter the password   
					Title List   
					10:10 AM   
					Auto   
					Adjusts to low lighting when   
					power is off.   
					Timer   
					Enter the password.   
					Bright   
					Dimmer   
					Maintains bright lighting   
					when power is off.   
					Edit   
					Dubbing   
					Disc Setting   
					Setup   
					Maintains low lighting   
					regardless of whether power   
					is on or off.   
					Off   
					Turns off the lighting when   
					power is off. Maintains the   
					lighting when power is on.   
					,continued   
					103   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Command Mode   
					Changes the command mode of this recorder if   
					other DVD equipment is assigned the same   
					command mode. Be sure to match the command   
					mode of the supplied remote to the setting made   
					
					
					
					Easy Setup   
					(Resetting the Recorder)   
					Select this to run the Easy Setup program.   
					1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is   
					in stop mode.   
					DVD 1   
					Select this if the default   
					command mode conflicts   
					with other DVD equipment.   
					2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					3 Select “Easy Setup,” and press ENTER.   
					DVD 2   
					Select this if the default   
					command mode conflicts   
					with other DVD equipment.   
					Easy Setup   
					10:10 AM   
					Follow the guide to make initial settings.   
					Before you start,   
					Check that you have made all necessary connections.   
					DVD 3   
					The default command mode   
					of the recorder.   
					Start   
					Cancel   
					Factory Setting   
					Allows you to return the setup settings to their   
					default settings. Note that all of your previous   
					settings will be lost.   
					4 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.   
					1 
					2 
					
					Setting,” and press ENTER.   
					5 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup   
					(page 23) from step 5.   
					Select “Start,” and press ENTER.   
					The setup settings return to their default   
					settings.   
					3 
					Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.   
					The power automatically turns off and then on   
					again, and the recorder is reset to the factory   
					settings.   
					When the “Easy Setup” display appears,   
					follow the instructions for Easy Setup   
					(page 23) from step 4.   
					104   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				mode to operate the DVD recorder and then hold   
					down X PAUSE on the recorder for five seconds   
					or more.   
					Additional Information   
					There is no picture or the picture noise appears   
					when connected to the DV IN jack.   
					, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and   
					on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off   
					and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the   
					i.LINK cable again.   
					Troubleshooting   
					If you experience any of the following difficulties   
					while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting   
					guide to help remedy the problem before   
					requesting repairs. Should any problem persist,   
					consult your nearest Sony dealer.   
					There is no picture or the picture noise appears   
					when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.   
					, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and   
					on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off   
					and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the   
					HDMI cord again.   
					Power   
					The power does not turn on.   
					, Check that the AC power cord is connected   
					securely.   
					, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output,   
					changing the “HDMI Resolution” setting in the   
					
					Connect the TV and the recorder using a video   
					jack other than the HDMI OUT, and switch the   
					TV’s input to the connected video input so that   
					you can see the on-screen displays. Change the   
					“HDMI Resolution” setting in the “Video” setup,   
					and switch the TV’s input back to HDMI. If the   
					picture still does not appear, repeat the steps and   
					try other options.   
					Picture   
					There is no picture.   
					, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.   
					, The connecting cords are damaged.   
					
					, Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to   
					“VIDEO”) so that the signal from the recorder   
					appears on the TV screen.   
					, The recorder is connected to an input device that   
					is not HDCP compliant (page 16).   
					Picture noise appears.   
					
					switch the input selector on your TV so that the   
					signal from the recorder appears on the TV   
					screen.   
					The channel on the cable box/satellite receiver   
					has been changed.   
					, The set top box controller is connected and “Set   
					Top Box Control” is set to “On.” Check the “Set   
					Top Box Control” settings in “Features” setup   
					
					, If the picture output signal from your recorder   
					passes through your VCR to get to your TV, or if   
					you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO   
					player, the copy-protection signal applied to   
					some DVD programs could affect picture   
					quality. If you still experience this problem even   
					when you connect your recorder directly to your   
					TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV’s   
					S VIDEO input.   
					, You have set the recorder to progressive format   
					even though your TV cannot accept the   
					progressive signal. In this case, set “Progressive”   
					
					DVD in stop mode to operate the DVD recorder   
					and then hold down X PAUSE on the recorder   
					for five seconds or more.   
					The picture from equipment connected to the   
					recorder’s input jack does not appear on the   
					screen.   
					, If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1 IN   
					jack, select “LINE1” in the front panel display by   
					pressing INPUT.   
					If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN   
					jacks, select “LINE2” in the front panel display   
					by pressing INPUT.   
					, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive   
					format (480p) signals, the image may be affected   
					when you set the recorder to progressive format.   
					In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off” in   
					
					,continued   
					105   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				The playback picture or TV program from the   
					equipment connected through the recorder is   
					distorted.   
					, If the playback picture output from a DVD   
					player, VCR, or tuner goes through your recorder   
					before reaching your TV, the copy-protection   
					signal applied to some programs could affect   
					picture quality. Disconnect the playback   
					equipment in question and connect it directly to   
					your TV.   
					The sound volume is low.   
					, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.   
					The sound volume may improve if you set   
					“Audio DRC” in “Audio” setup to “Wide   
					
					An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or   
					played.   
					, If you have connected an AV amplifier to the   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or   
					COAXIAL) jack and want to change the audio   
					track for a DVD-RW (VR mode)/DVD-R (VR   
					mode) during playback, set “Dolby Digital” in   
					
					The picture does not fill the screen.   
					, Set “TV Type” in “Video” setup to fit the aspect   
					
					, When recording to a disc other than DVD-RWs   
					(VR mode)/DVD-Rs (VR mode), set “Line   
					Audio Input” in “Audio” setup to “Stereo.”   
					The picture does not fill the screen, even   
					though the aspect ratio is set in “TV Type” in   
					“Video” setup.   
					DVD Playback   
					, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.   
					The disc does not play.   
					, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the   
					labeled side facing up.   
					Sound   
					There is no sound.   
					, The disc is not correctly inserted.   
					, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.   
					Remove the disc and leave the recorder turned on   
					for about half an hour until the moisture   
					evaporates.   
					, If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the   
					recorder cannot play the disc if it was not   
					
					, Re-connect all connections securely.   
					, The connecting cord is damaged.   
					, The input source setting on the amplifier or the   
					connection to the amplifier is incorrect.   
					, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-forward,   
					slow motion, or pause mode.   
					, If the audio signal does not come through the   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or   
					COAXIAL) jack, check the “Audio” setup   
					
					The disc does not start playback from the   
					beginning.   
					
					, You have inserted a disc whose Title menu or   
					DVD menu automatically appears on the TV   
					screen when it is first inserted. Use the menu to   
					start playback.   
					No sound is output from the HDMI OUT jack.   
					, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off and   
					on again. 2Turn the connected equipment off   
					and on again. 3Disconnect and then connect the   
					HDMI cord again.   
					, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI   
					device (DVI jacks do not accept audio signals).   
					, The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT   
					jack does not conform to the audio signal format.   
					The recorder starts playing the disc   
					automatically.   
					, The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback   
					function.   
					Sound is noisy.   
					, When playing a CD with DTS soundtracks, noise   
					will come from the LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) or   
					
					Playback stops automatically.   
					, If the disc has an auto pause signal, the recorder   
					stops playback at the auto pause signal.   
					106   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				, When playing a disc containing JPEG image   
					Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slow-   
					motion Play cannot be performed.   
					
					, Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do   
					some of the operations above. See the instruction   
					manual supplied with the disc.   
					, While the recorder is reading disc information,   
					playback operations will not work.   
					The JPEG image file cannot be played.   
					, The DATA CD is not recorded in a JPEG format   
					that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2.   
					, The JPEG image file does not have the extension   
					“.JPG” or “.JPEG.”   
					, The data is not formatted in JPEG even though it   
					has the extension “.JPG” or “JPEG.”   
					, The length or width of the image is more than   
					4,720 dots.   
					, When playing a disc containing MP3 audio   
					
					The language for the soundtrack cannot be   
					changed.   
					, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the disc   
					being played.   
					, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the   
					language for the soundtrack.   
					, Try changing the language using the DVD   
					VIDEO’s menu.   
					The title of the MP3 audio album/ track or JPEG   
					image folder/file is not correctly displayed.   
					, The recorder can only display numbers and   
					alphabet. Other characters are displayed as   
					asterisks.   
					The subtitle language cannot be changed or   
					turned off.   
					, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the   
					DVD VIDEO.   
					, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the   
					subtitles.   
					, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD   
					VIDEO’s menu.   
					DVD Recording/Timer recording/   
					Editing   
					The channel cannot be changed from the   
					channel you are recording.   
					, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”   
					, The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles   
					recorded on this recorder.   
					Recording does not start immediately after   
					z REC is pressed.   
					, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”   
					“FORMAT,” or “INF WRITE” disappears from   
					the front panel display.   
					The angles cannot be changed.   
					, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD   
					VIDEO being played.   
					, You are trying to change the angles when “   
					does not appear in the front panel display   
					
					” 
					Nothing was recorded even though the timer   
					setting is set correctly.   
					, There was a power failure during recording.   
					, Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC   
					outlet, and connect it again.   
					, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles.   
					, Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO’s   
					menu.   
					, The angles cannot be changed for the titles   
					recorded on this recorder.   
					, The program contains copy protection signals   
					that restrict copying.   
					The MP3 audio track cannot be played.   
					, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3   
					format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/   
					Level 2.   
					, The MP3 audio track does not have the extension   
					“.MP3.”   
					, The program that starts first has priority and the   
					second program starts recording only after the   
					first program has finished. If the programs start   
					at the same time, the program listed first in the   
					
					, There is no DVD inserted in the recorder.   
					, There is not enough disc space for the recording.   
					, The connected cable box/satellite receiver was   
					turned off.   
					, The set top box controller was incorrectly   
					
					, The data is not formatted in MP3 even though it   
					has the extension “.MP3.”   
					, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.   
					, The recorder cannot play audio tracks in   
					MP3PRO format.   
					,continued   
					107   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				, The settings in “Set Top Box Control” in   
					VCR Playback   
					“Features” setup have been changed (page 101).   
					The playback picture does not appear on the TV   
					screen.   
					Recording does not stop immediately after   
					x STOP is pressed.   
					, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input   
					disc data before recording can stop.   
					, 
					Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.   
					If a monitor is used, set it to video input.   
					The picture is not clear.   
					, Adjust the tracking by the TRACKING +/–   
					button.   
					Timer recording is not complete or did not start   
					from the beginning.   
					, There was a power failure during recording.   
					, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to a   
					power failure that lasted for more than 30   
					
					, The channel or input changed from the one you   
					are recording.   
					, The program that starts first has priority and the   
					second program starts recording only after the   
					first program has finished. If the programs start   
					at the same time, the program listed first in the   
					menu has priority (page 50).   
					
					the video heads using a Sony video head cleaning   
					cassette. If a Sony cleaning cassette is not   
					available in your area, have the heads cleaned at   
					your nearest Sony dealer (a standard service fee   
					will be charged). Do not use a commercially   
					available liquid type cleaning cassette, as it may   
					damage the video heads.   
					, The video heads may have to be replaced.   
					Consult your local Sony dealer for more   
					information.   
					, There is not enough disc space for the recording.   
					, The tape is defective.   
					The c indicator flashes after timer recording is   
					set.   
					
					, The disc does not have any space for recording.   
					, The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents   
					further recording.   
					The picture rolls vertically during picture   
					search.   
					, Adjust the vertical hold control on the TV or   
					monitor.   
					The picture has no sound.   
					, The tape is defective.   
					
					, Check the audio cord connection.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after   
					Synchro-Recording is set.   
					
					, Insert a disc with enough space for the recording.   
					, The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents   
					further recording.   
					A tape cannot be inserted.   
					, Check that a tape is not already in the tape   
					compartment.   
					VCR Recording   
					
					The channel cannot be changed from the one   
					you are recording.   
					Contents previously recorded were erased.   
					, Data that has been recorded on a DVD with a PC   
					will be erased from the disc when the disc is   
					inserted.   
					, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”   
					No TV program appears on the TV screen.   
					, 
					Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.   
					If a monitor is used, set it to video input.   
					The tape starts playing as soon as it is   
					inserted.   
					, The safety tab has been removed. To record on   
					this tape, cover the tab hole.   
					108   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				The tape is ejected when z REC is pressed.   
					The recording mode indication is incorrect.   
					, Since the recording mode for recorded titles is   
					calculated after sampling the recorded data   
					during playback, it may be displayed differently   
					from the mode you selected when recording.   
					However, the actual recording itself is correctly   
					made in the selected mode.   
					, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.   
					Nothing happens when z REC is pressed.   
					, Make sure the tape is not at its end.   
					VCR Timer recording   
					The timer does not operate.   
					Remote control   
					, Check that the clock is correctly set.   
					, Make sure a tape has been inserted.   
					, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.   
					, Make sure the tape is not at its end.   
					, Make sure a program has been set for timer   
					recording.   
					The remote does not function.   
					, Batteries are weak.   
					, The remote is too far from the recorder.   
					, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to the   
					default setting when you replaced the batteries.   
					
					, Turn on the recorder.   
					, The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on   
					the recorder.   
					, Make sure the timer settings are set for a future   
					time.   
					, Check that the cable box is turned on.   
					, “- -:- -” appears in the front panel display if the   
					recorder is disconnected from the wall outlet for   
					more than 30 minutes. Reset the clock and timer.   
					, Turn the power off and unplug the AC power   
					cord.   
					, Different command modes are set for the   
					recorder and remote. Set the same command   
					
					Other Sony equipment responds to the remote.   
					, The same command mode is set for both the   
					Sony DVD equipment. Set a different command   
					
					, The program that starts first has priority and the   
					second program starts recording only after the   
					first program has finished. If the programs start   
					at the same time, the program listed first in the   
					menu has priority (page 79).   
					Others   
					The c indicator flashes after timer recording is   
					set.   
					The recorder does not operate properly.   
					, Restart the recorder. Press down "/1 on the   
					recorder for more than ten seconds until “SONY   
					DVD” appears in the front panel display.   
					, When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder   
					to operate abnormally, turn off the recorder and   
					wait until the clock appears in the front panel   
					display. Then, unplug the recorder and after   
					leaving it off for a while, plug it in again.   
					, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.   
					The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after   
					Synchro-Recording is set.   
					, Check that the safety tab has not been removed.   
					Display   
					Menus or displays do not appear on the   
					screen.   
					, While the recorder is reading disc information,   
					the System Menu, OPTIONS menu, or   
					information display will not appear.   
					The disc tray does not open after you press   
					Z OPEN/CLOSE.   
					, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to   
					open after you have recorded or edited a disc.   
					This is because the recorder is adding disc data to   
					the disc.   
					“- -:- -” appears in the front panel display.   
					
					The c indicator is flashing.   
					, The disc does not have any space for recording.   
					, Insert a recordable disc or a tape with its safety   
					tab in place inside the recorder.   
					,continued   
					109   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				“Cannot record because of high temperature.”   
					appears on the TV screen.   
					Notes About This Recorder   
					, Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is   
					not blocked. Then, turn off the recorder, wait   
					until the clock appears in the front panel display,   
					and disconnect the AC power cord. Leave the   
					recorder off for a while, then re-connect the   
					power cord, and press "/1 on the recorder.   
					On adjusting volume   
					Do not turn up the volume while listening to a   
					section with very low level inputs or no audio   
					signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged   
					when a peak level section is played.   
					On cleaning   
					“CHILD LOCK” appears in the front panel   
					Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft   
					cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent   
					solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad,   
					scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or   
					benzine.   
					display.   
					, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child Lock   
					
					Control by AV mouse is not possible.   
					, Some satellite receivers may not support AV   
					mouse.   
					On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners   
					Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens cleaners   
					(including wet or spray types). These may   
					cause the apparatus to malfunction.   
					The Set Top Box Control function does not   
					work.   
					, Turn on the recorder.   
					On replacement of parts   
					In the event that this unit is repaired, repaired parts   
					may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes.   
					Notes about the discs   
					• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its   
					edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,   
					fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may cause   
					it to malfunction.   
					• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat   
					sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car   
					parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may   
					rise considerably inside the car.   
					• After playing, store the disc in its case.   
					• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the   
					disc from the center out.   
					• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,   
					commercially available disc/lens cleaners, or   
					anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.   
					• Do not use the following discs.   
					110   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,   
					card, heart).   
					– A disc with a label or sticker on it.   
					– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker   
					adhesive on it.   
					Specifications   
					System   
					[DVD recorder section]   
					Laser   
					Semiconductor laser   
					Audio recording format   
					Dolby Digital   
					Symptoms caused by contaminated video   
					heads   
					Video recording format   
					MPEG Video   
					initial   
					contamination   
					terminal   
					[VCR section]   
					Format   
					When the video heads are dirty, the picture is   
					distorted or the tape cannot be played.   
					VHS NTSC standard   
					Video recording system   
					Rotary head helical scanning FM system   
					Video heads   
					Double azimuth four heads   
					Video signal   
					Clean the video heads using a Sony video head   
					cleaning cassette. If a Sony cleaning cassette is not   
					available in your area, have the heads cleaned at   
					your nearest Sony dealer (a standard service fee   
					will be charged). Do not use a commercially   
					available liquid type cleaning cassette, as it may   
					damage the video heads.   
					NTSC color, EIA standards   
					Tape speed   
					3 
					SP: 33.35 mm/s (1 /8 inches/s)   
					7 
					EP: 11.12 mm/s ( /16 inches/s)   
					11   
					LP: 16.67 mm/s ( /16 inches/s),   
					playback only   
					Maximum recording/playback time   
					8 hrs. in EP mode (with T-160 tape)   
					Rewind time   
					Approx. 2 min (with T-120 tape)   
					[Timer section]   
					Clock   
					Quartz locked   
					Timer indication   
					12-hour cycle   
					Timer setting   
					12 programs in total (max.)   
					,continued   
					111   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Inputs and outputs   
					General   
					Power requirements   
					120 V AC, 60 Hz   
					Power consumption   
					31 W   
					LINE 1 IN and LINE 2 IN   
					VIDEO IN, phono jack (1 each)   
					Input signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced,   
					sync negative   
					Power back-up   
					AUDIO IN, phono jacks (2 each)   
					Input level: 327 mVrms   
					Input impedance: more than 47 kilohms   
					LINE 2 IN   
					Back-up duration: 30 min   
					Operating temperature   
					5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)   
					Storage temperature   
					–20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F)   
					Operating humidity   
					25% to 80%   
					Dimensions including projecting parts   
					and controls (w/h/d)   
					Approx. 430 × 82 × 332 mm   
					S VIDEO, 4-pin, mini-DIN jack   
					Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative   
					C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms   
					DV IN, 4-pin jack, i.LINK S100   
					LINE OUT   
					VIDEO OUT, phono jack (1)   
					Output signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,   
					unbalanced, sync negative   
					AUDIO OUT, phono jacks (2)   
					Standard output: 327 mVrms   
					Load impedance: 47 kilohms   
					Output impedance: less than 10 kilohms   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					1 
					1 
					(Approx. 17 × 3 /4 × 13 /8 inches)   
					Mass   
					Approx. 4.7 kg (Approx. 10.4 lbs)   
					Supplied accessories   
					Remote commander (remote) (1)   
					Size AA (R6) batteries (2)   
					Audio/video cord (1)   
					OPTICAL, Optical output jack   
					–18 dBm (wave length: 660 nm)   
					COAXIAL, phono jack   
					Set top box controller (1)   
					Design and specifications are subject to change   
					without notice.   
					Output signal: 0.5 Vp-p, 75 ohms   
					COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR)   
					Phono jack   
					Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms   
					S VIDEO OUT   
					4-pin, mini-DIN jack   
					Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative   
					C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms   
					SET TOP BOX CONTROL   
					Mini jack   
					HDMI   
					HDMI 19 pin-Standard Connector   
					112   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				i.LINK baud rate   
					i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to   
					the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are   
					defined:   
					S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)   
					S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)   
					About i.LINK   
					The DV IN jack on this recorder is an i.LINK-   
					compliant DV IN jack. This section describes the   
					i.LINK standard and its features.   
					S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)   
					What is i.LINK?   
					i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling   
					digital video, digital audio and other data in two   
					directions between equipment having the i.LINK   
					jack, and for controlling other equipment.   
					i.LINK-compatible pieces of equipment can be   
					connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible   
					applications are operations and data transactions   
					with various digital AV equipment. When two or   
					more i.LINK-compatible equipment are   
					connected to this recorder in a daisy chain,   
					operations and data transactions are possible with   
					not only the equipment that this recorder is   
					connected to but also with other devices via the   
					directly connected equipment.   
					Note, however, that the method of operation   
					sometimes varies according to the characteristics   
					and specifications of the equipment to be   
					connected, and that operations and data   
					transactions are sometimes not possible on some   
					connected equipment.   
					The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in   
					the instruction manual of each equipment. It is   
					also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some   
					equipment.   
					The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it   
					is not indicated such as this unit is “S100.”   
					When units are connected to equipment having a   
					different maximum baud rate, the baud rate   
					sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.   
					* What is Mbps?   
					Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of   
					data that can be sent or received in one second. For   
					example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100   
					megabits of data can be sent in one second.   
					i.LINK functions on this recorder   
					For details on how to dub when this recorder is   
					connected to other video equipment having DV   
					
					The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC-   
					SD signals. It cannot output signals. The DV jack   
					will not accept MICROMV signals from   
					equipment such as a MICROMV digital video   
					camera with an i.LINK jack.   
					
					For details on precautions when connecting this   
					recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the   
					equipment to be connected.   
					Note   
					Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected   
					to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting   
					cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK-   
					compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks   
					(DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment   
					to be connected.   
					About the name “i.LINK”   
					i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data   
					transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a   
					trademark approved by many corporations.   
					IEEE 1394 is an international standard   
					standardized by the Institute of Electrical and   
					Electronics Engineers.   
					Required i.LINK cable   
					Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during   
					DV/D8 dubbing).   
					i.LINK and are trademarks.   
					113   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Guide to Parts and Controls   
					For more information, see the pages in parentheses.   
					Front panel   
					Buttons on the recorder have the same function as the buttons on the remote if they have the same or   
					similar names.   
					Open the   
					cover   
					
					
					
					
					76)   
					K 
					(remote sensor) (20)   
					
					
					
					
					
					
					
					1 2   
					O CHANNEL/TRACKING +/– buttons* *   
					
					
					
					H m/M (rewind/fast-forward) buttons   
					(37)   
					
					
					
					
					R LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/AUDIO L   
					(MONO)/R) jacks (27)   
					*1   
					The CHANNEL/TRACKING + button has a tactile   
					dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.   
					The CHANNEL +/– buttons are used for channel   
					*2   
					selection when the set top box control is turned on   
					
					114   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Remote   
					For DVD functions   
					I . PREV (previous)/> NEXT   
					buttons (36)   
					J 
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE buttons   
					
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					K m   
					/ 
					
					
					
					
					
					1 2   
					
					
					
					1 
					
					SUBTITLE button (36)   
					
					
					TIMER button (49)   
					
					
					1 
					
					
					
					
					wj TV buttons   
					
					• INPUT button (21)   
					1 
					
					
					• VOL (volume) +/– button (21)   
					• DIGITAL/ANALOG button (21)   
					
					1 
					
					*1   
					SET button (102)   
					Number 5, AUDIO, CH +, and H PLAY buttons   
					have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.   
					
					*2   
					The CH +/– button are used for channel selection   
					
					
					MENU button (35)   
					
					
					
					,continued   
					115   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				For VCR functions   
					
					1 
					
					
					
					
					
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					F . PREV (previous)/> NEXT   
					buttons (71)   
					G 
					(search) buttons (71)   
					
					
					
					
					
					1 2   
					M CH (channel)/TRACKING +/– button* *   
					
					
					
					1 
					
					
					
					
					T 
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE buttons   
					(71)   
					1 
					
					
					
					
					Y TV buttons   
					
					• INPUT button (21)   
					1 
					
					• VOL (volume) +/– button (21)   
					• DIGITAL/ANALOG button (21)   
					*1   
					Number 5, AUDIO, CH +, and H PLAY buttons   
					have a tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.   
					*2   
					The CH +/– button are used for channel selection   
					
					116   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Front panel display   
					VR   
					RW   
					VCD   
					STEREO   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					A DVD playing/recording status   
					B Disc type/recording format   
					C Audio signal indicators   
					
					E VIDEO playing/recording status   
					F Tape indicator   
					
					• Playing time/remaining time   
					• Current title/chapter/track/index number   
					• Recording time/recording mode   
					• Clock   
					• Channel   
					I 
					(angle) indicator (36)   
					J Disc indicator   
					G Timer indicator   
					Rear panel   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					
					
					
					
					G LINE 1 IN (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks   
					
					H LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks   
					D DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL/   
					
					OPTICAL) jacks (18)   
					E COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR)   
					jacks (17)   
					117   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				DVD-RW (page 30)   
					Glossary   
					A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc   
					that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. The DVD-   
					RW has two different modes: VR mode and Video   
					mode. DVDs created in Video mode have the   
					same format as a DVD VIDEO, while discs   
					created in VR (Video Recording) mode allow the   
					contents to be programmed or edited.   
					Chapter (page 40)   
					Sections of a picture or a music feature that are   
					smaller than titles. A title is composed of several   
					chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may   
					be recorded.   
					DVD+R (page 30)   
					Copy protection signals (page 47)   
					A DVD+R (read “plus R”) is a recordable disc that   
					is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can   
					be recorded only once to a DVD+R, and will have   
					the same format as a DVD VIDEO.   
					Copy restriction set by copyright owners, etc.   
					These signals are included in some software or TV   
					programs and restrict recording on this recorder.   
					Dolby Digital (page 98)   
					DVD-R (page 30)   
					Digital audio compression technology developed   
					by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms   
					to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel   
					is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel   
					in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same   
					discrete channels of high quality digital audio   
					found in “Dolby Digital” theater surround sound   
					systems. Good channel separation is realized   
					because all of the channel data is recorded   
					discretely, and little deterioration occurs because   
					all channel data processing is digital.   
					A DVD-R is a recordable disc that is the same size   
					as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can be recorded only   
					once to a DVD-R. The DVD-R has two different   
					modes: VR mode and Video mode. DVDs created   
					in Video mode have the same format as a DVD   
					VIDEO, while discs created in VR (Video   
					Recording) mode allow the contents to be   
					programmed or edited.   
					DVD VIDEO (page 33)   
					A disc that contains up to eight hours of moving   
					pictures on a disc the same diameter as a CD.   
					The data capacity of a single-layer and single-   
					sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7   
					times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-   
					layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-   
					layer and double-sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and   
					double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17 GB.   
					The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, which   
					is a worldwide standard of digital compression   
					technology. The picture data is compressed to   
					about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD   
					also uses a variable rate coding technology that   
					changes the data to be allocated according to the   
					status of the picture. Audio information is   
					recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby   
					Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio   
					presence.   
					
					Digital audio compression technology by Digital   
					Theater Systems, Inc. This technology conforms   
					to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel   
					is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel   
					in this format. DTS provides the same discrete   
					channels of high quality digital audio.   
					Good channel separation is realized because all of   
					the channel data is recorded discretely, and little   
					deterioration occurs because all channel data   
					processing is digital.   
					DVD+RW (page 30)   
					A DVD+RW (read “plus RW”) is a recordable and   
					rewritable disc. DVD+RWs use a recording   
					format that is comparable to the DVD VIDEO   
					format.   
					Furthermore, various advanced functions such as   
					the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental   
					Control functions are provided on the DVD.   
					118   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)   
					
					Track (page 40)   
					Sections of a music feature on a CD (the length of   
					a song).   
					HDMI is an interface that supports both video and   
					audio on a single digital connection. The HDMI   
					connection carries standard to high definition   
					video signals and multi-channel audio signals to   
					AV components such as HDMI equipped TVs, in   
					digital form without degradation.   
					The HDMI specification supports HDCP (High-   
					bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a copy   
					protection technology that incorporates coding   
					technology for digital video signals.   
					Interlace format   
					Interlace format shows every other line of an   
					image as a single “field” and is the standard   
					method for displaying images on television. The   
					even number field shows the even numbered lines   
					of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the   
					odd numbered lines of an image.   
					Original (page 56)   
					Titles actually recorded on a DVD-RW (VR   
					mode) or DVD-R (VR mode). Erasing original   
					titles frees up disc space on DVD-RWs.   
					Playlist (page 56)   
					Playback information created from the actual   
					recordings on a DVD-RW (VR mode) or DVD-R   
					(VR mode). A Playlist leaves the original titles as   
					they are, and contains only the information needed   
					to control playback. A Playlist title takes up very   
					little disc space.   
					Progressive format (page 97)   
					Compared to the Interlace format that alternately   
					shows every other line of an image (field) to create   
					one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire   
					image at once as a single frame. This means that   
					while the Interlace format can show 30 frames/60   
					fields in one second, the Progressive format can   
					show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture   
					quality increases and still images, text, and   
					horizontal lines appear sharper.   
					Title (page 40)   
					The longest section of a picture or music feature   
					on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the   
					entire album in audio software.   
					119   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Abbreviation   
					TUR   
					Language   
					Turkish   
					DVD Audio/Subtitle   
					Language   
					VIE   
					Vietnamese   
					Afrikaans   
					ZAF   
					When you play a DVD VIDEO, the language of   
					the selected audio track or subtitle is abbreviated   
					
					or subtitle.   
					Abbreviation   
					ARA   
					BUL   
					CHI   
					Language   
					Arabic   
					Bulgarian   
					Chinese   
					Croatian   
					Czech   
					CRO   
					CZE   
					DAN   
					DEU   
					ENG   
					ESP   
					Danish   
					German   
					English   
					Spanish   
					Finish   
					FIN   
					FRA   
					GRE   
					HUN   
					IDN   
					French   
					Greek   
					Hungarian   
					Indonesian   
					Hindi   
					IND   
					ISL   
					Icelandic   
					Italian   
					ITA   
					IWR   
					JPN   
					Hebrew   
					Japanese   
					Korean   
					Malay   
					KOR   
					MAL   
					NLD   
					NOR   
					POL   
					Dutch   
					Norwegian   
					Polish   
					POR   
					RUS   
					SVE   
					Portuguese   
					Russian   
					Swedish   
					Thai   
					THA   
					120   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Cable box brand   
					Betavue   
					Code number   
					0022   
					Cable Box/Satellite   
					Receiver Brand Code   
					British Telecom   
					BVS   
					0003   
					0641   
					When you want to use the set top box control   
					function, find the brand code number of your cable   
					box/satellite receiver from the list and enter it in   
					
					If more than one code number is listed, try   
					entering them one at a time until you find the one   
					that works with your cable box/satellite receiver.   
					Cable Healthcare   
					Cable Star   
					Cabletenna   
					Cableview   
					Century   
					0769, 0058   
					0056   
					0022, 0039   
					0022   
					0153, 0618, 0008, 0315   
					0017   
					Citation   
					Cable box brand   
					Code number   
					Citizen   
					0153, 0315, 0078, 0242   
					0883   
					3M   
					0033   
					Clearmaster   
					ClearMax   
					ABC   
					0003, 0007, 0011, 0017,   
					0008, 0014, 0001, 0013,   
					0206, 0047, 0237, 0033   
					0883, 1247   
					0031, 0025   
					0233, 0232   
					0274   
					Colour Voice   
					Comband   
					Accuphase   
					0003, 0007, 0013, 0047,   
					0001, 0011, 0017, 0014,   
					0206   
					Comtec   
					Comtronics   
					Comtronics Eagle   
					Contec   
					0060, 0040   
					0040, 0060   
					0019   
					Acorn   
					1102, 0237   
					0237   
					Action   
					Active   
					0237, 1102   
					0015   
					Coolmax   
					0883   
					Aim   
					Curtis Mathes   
					Dae Ryung Eagle   
					Daeryung   
					0015, 0242   
					0008   
					Allegro   
					Amark   
					0315, 0153   
					0008, 0277, 0144, 0056   
					0060   
					0008, 0877, 0477, 0277,   
					1877   
					American   
					Americast   
					Antronix   
					Anvision   
					Apache   
					Arbatron   
					Archer   
					0899   
					Diamond   
					Digeo   
					0035   
					0207, 0022   
					0211, 0111   
					0770   
					1476   
					Digi   
					0637   
					Director   
					Dumont   
					Eagle Comtronics   
					Eastern   
					0476   
					0014, 0011, 0003, 0476   
					0637   
					0153, 0022, 0207, 0039,   
					0797, 0237, 0260   
					0060, 0028   
					0002, 0274, 0418   
					0078   
					ASE   
					1080   
					Electricord   
					Emerson   
					Everquest   
					Focus   
					Auna   
					1269   
					0797, 0303, 0015, 0014   
					0040, 0015   
					0400   
					BBT   
					0267   
					BCC   
					0276   
					Belcor   
					0056, 0022   
					0014   
					Fosgate   
					0276   
					Bell & Howell   
					Bell Atlantic   
					Bell South   
					Bestlink   
					Fujitsu   
					0246   
					0641   
					Funai   
					0248, 0019   
					0649   
					0899   
					FutureVision   
					0303   
					,continued   
					121   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Cable box brand   
					Garrard   
					Code number   
					0153   
					Cable box brand   
					Maestro   
					Code number   
					0812   
					Gateway   
					0764   
					Magnavox   
					0797, 0027, 0032, 0334,   
					0069   
					GC Electronics   
					0207, 0056, 0330, 0016,   
					0040, 0077, 0030   
					Millennium   
					Memorex   
					Mitsubishi   
					Motorola   
					0618, 0153   
					0000   
					GE   
					0232, 0233, 0144, 0021   
					Gemini   
					0015, 0070, 0057, 0242,   
					0014, 0797, 0013, 0400   
					0003   
					0476, 0276, 1476, 0810,   
					1376, 1254, 0400, 1106   
					General Instrument   
					0476, 0011, 0014, 0098,   
					0810, 0024, 0003, 0015,   
					0276   
					Movie Time   
					MS   
					0156, 0078, 0063, 0203   
					0069, 0015, 1018, 0303   
					GHZ   
					0078   
					MultiVision   
					Myrio   
					0012   
					Gibraltar   
					Global   
					0003   
					1117   
					1327   
					NET   
					0274   
					GMI   
					0069, 0057, 0015, 0797   
					0144, 0040   
					0770, 0797   
					1136   
					Next Level   
					Nexus   
					0764, 1316, 1315, 1314   
					0770   
					GoldStar   
					Goodmind   
					Gradiente   
					Hamlin   
					Northcoast   
					Nova Vision   
					Novabeam   
					Novaplex   
					NSC   
					0671, 0314   
					0277, 0008   
					0277   
					0020, 0009, 0034, 0259,   
					0015, 0273, 0206   
					Healthway Interactive   
					Hitachi   
					0058, 1020, 1015, 0769   
					0618, 0277, 0017, 0008   
					0011, 0154, 0009, 0008,   
					0003, 0033, 0014, 0255   
					0156, 0070, 0203, 0063,   
					0400, 0012, 0618, 0022,   
					0637, 0010, 0044   
					Houston Tracker   
					Hwalin   
					0011   
					Oak   
					0007, 0019, 0303, 0248,   
					0017   
					0303   
					Hytek   
					0007   
					Omega   
					0015   
					0371   
					0021   
					0237   
					0843   
					IBM   
					0670   
					Omniview   
					Optimus   
					Pace   
					IEEC   
					1018   
					Interbuy   
					IPC Guest Services   
					Jasco   
					0274   
					0893   
					Pacific Bell   
					Panasonic   
					0315, 0153, 0015   
					0014, 0400   
					0107, 0021, 0144, 0008,   
					0124, 0307, 0000, 0040   
					Jebsee   
					Jerrold   
					0003, 0014, 0276, 0011,   
					0012, 0020, 0024, 0015,   
					0047, 0098, 0476, 0031,   
					0029, 0111, 0032, 0054,   
					0810, 0028   
					Panther   
					Paragon   
					Penney   
					Philips   
					0637   
					0000, 0525, 0008   
					0637, 0000   
					0025, 0031, 0290, 0027,   
					0030, 0153, 0060, 0242,   
					0028, 0334, 0211, 0029,   
					0259, 0307, 0652, 0013,   
					0069, 0649, 0255, 0305,   
					0032, 0111, 0317   
					Kuang Yu   
					Leon   
					0024   
					0069, 0015   
					0040, 0144   
					0440   
					LG   
					Linsay   
					Macom   
					Pioneer   
					0144, 0023, 0533, 1877,   
					0877, 0260   
					0033   
					122   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Cable box brand   
					Popular Mechanics   
					Prelude   
					Code number   
					0400   
					Cable box brand   
					Sony   
					Code number   
					1006   
					0770   
					Spectradyne   
					Spectravision   
					Sprucer   
					0769, 0058   
					Prism   
					0012, 0013, 0059   
					0786   
					0058   
					Protelcon   
					Pulsar   
					0021, 0307, 0010, 0144   
					0203, 0096, 0155   
					0000, 0040   
					0000   
					Standard Components   
					Starcom   
					Quasar   
					0003, 0015, 0047, 0014,   
					0098, 0305   
					Quest   
					0144, 0020   
					0040   
					Stargate   
					0015, 0040, 0770, 0865,   
					0797, 0305, 0014   
					R Line   
					RadioShack   
					0883, 0015, 0315, 0303,   
					0797   
					Starquest   
					StarSight   
					Stealth   
					0015   
					0542, 0422   
					0274   
					Rampage   
					Ranger   
					RCA   
					0255   
					1247   
					Stellar One   
					Storm   
					0807   
					0021, 0060, 0797, 0047,   
					1256, 0843   
					1018, 0637   
					1230   
					Realistic   
					Recoton   
					Regal   
					0207, 0153   
					0153, 0400   
					Suena Madritel   
					Supercable   
					Supermax   
					Sylvania   
					Tandy   
					0276   
					0259, 0020, 0273, 0279,   
					0276   
					0883   
					0001   
					Regency   
					0002, 0020, 0682   
					0258   
					Rembrandt   
					0070, 0153, 0040, 0022,   
					0011   
					Tatung   
					0097   
					Teac   
					1018   
					RK   
					0304, 0306, 0479   
					0000   
					Technics   
					Teknika   
					Teleavia   
					TeleCaption   
					Teleview   
					Texscan   
					TFC   
					0029   
					Runco   
					Samsung   
					0146   
					0040, 0144, 0023, 0003,   
					0070, 0000   
					0040   
					Sasktel   
					1737   
					0221   
					Scientific Atlanta   
					0008, 0277, 0017, 0006,   
					0237, 0025, 0477, 0207,   
					0877, 0003, 0012, 0000,   
					0021, 1877   
					0063, 0040   
					0001, 0096, 0010   
					0310   
					Seam   
					0510   
					Thomson   
					Timeless   
					Tocom   
					1256   
					Sears   
					0510   
					0418, 0274, 0040   
					Sejin   
					1265   
					0012, 0013, 0029, 0019,   
					0059, 0017   
					Siemens   
					Sigma   
					0246   
					Torx   
					0003   
					0019   
					Toshiba   
					Trans PX   
					Trinity   
					Tristar   
					TS   
					0000   
					Signal   
					0040, 0015, 0011, 0035   
					0303, 0276, 0153, 0315   
					Signature   
					SkyCable   
					Skygiant   
					SL Marx   
					0011   
					0112   
					1091   
					0040   
					1248   
					0883   
					0255, 0024, 1018, 0003,   
					0303   
					,continued   
					123   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Cable box brand   
					Tusa   
					Code number   
					0015   
					Satellite receiver   
					brand   
					Code number   
					AlphaStar   
					0772   
					1333   
					0775   
					0856   
					0216   
					1109   
					TV COMM   
					TV Guide   
					TV86   
					0035, 0019   
					1476   
					Atlantic Telephone   
					Bell ExpressVu   
					Century   
					0063, 0040   
					0022, 0225   
					0207, 0153, 0022   
					0007   
					Uniden   
					Chaparral   
					Unika   
					Crossdigital   
					DirecTV   
					United Artists   
					United Cable   
					Universal   
					0749, 0566, 0392, 1749,   
					0099, 1109, 1076, 1442,   
					1856, 0247, 1142, 1639,   
					0724, 0639, 0819   
					0003, 0014, 0011, 0276   
					0191, 0078, 0207, 0056,   
					0022, 0039, 0153, 0077,   
					0322, 0315   
					Dish Network System   
					Dishpro   
					0775, 1005, 1170   
					0775, 1005   
					0775, 1170, 1005   
					0775   
					US Electronics   
					V2   
					0276, 0008, 0003, 0017   
					0883   
					Echostar   
					Verizon   
					0246   
					Expressvu   
					Galaxis   
					Videoway   
					VideoWorks   
					Vidtech   
					0250, 0000   
					0124   
					0863   
					GE   
					0566   
					0244   
					General Instrument   
					GOI   
					0361, 0869, 0627   
					0775   
					Viewmaster   
					Viewstar   
					0883, 0770   
					0258, 0289, 0060, 0063,   
					0211, 0027, 0111, 0030,   
					0121   
					Gradiente   
					Hitachi   
					0856   
					0819, 0749   
					0775   
					Vision   
					0883   
					1264   
					0883   
					0565   
					0078   
					Houston Tracker   
					HTS   
					Visionetics   
					Vortex View   
					WaveMaster   
					Wiso   
					0775   
					Hughes Network Systems 0749, 1749, 1442, 1142   
					Humax   
					1176, 1359, 1048, 0863,   
					0283   
					Innova   
					0099   
					Zenith   
					0000, 0525, 0054, 0017,   
					0039, 0153, 0060, 0315,   
					0191, 0899   
					Jerrold   
					0361, 0036, 0627   
					0775, 1170   
					0722, 0724   
					0869   
					JVC   
					Zentek   
					0400   
					Magnavox   
					McIntosh   
					Memorex   
					Mitsubishi   
					Motorola   
					NEC   
					0724   
					0749   
					0869   
					1270, 0496, 0499, 0507,   
					0508   
					Netsat   
					0099   
					Next Level   
					Optimus   
					Panasonic   
					0869   
					0724   
					0247, 0701   
					124   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Satellite receiver   
					brand   
					Code number   
					Paysat   
					Philips   
					0724   
					1076, 0099, 1142, 0724,   
					0722, 0749, 1442, 1749,   
					0856, 0775   
					Primestar   
					Proscan   
					QNS   
					0361, 0627, 0869   
					0392, 0566   
					1367   
					RadioShack   
					RCA   
					0869   
					0566, 0392, 0143, 0855   
					1109, 1276   
					0856, 0099, 1856   
					0639, 1639   
					0869   
					Samsung   
					Sky   
					Sony   
					Star Choice   
					Star Trak   
					Thomson   
					Tivo   
					0869, 0772   
					0566, 0392   
					1142, 1442   
					0790, 0749, 1749, 1285   
					1333, 1358   
					0724, 0722   
					0361   
					Toshiba   
					UEC   
					Uniden   
					Video Cipher II Plus   
					Zenith   
					0856, 1856   
					125   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				COMPONENT VIDEO OUT   
					
					Connecting   
					
					DVD+R DL 30   
					
					
					DVD-RAM 33   
					Index   
					the cable box/satellite   
					receiver 12   
					to your AV/amplifier   
					(receiver) 18   
					Words in quotations appear in   
					the on-screen displays.   
					
					Numerics   
					to your TV 15   
					E 
					
					“Connections” 101   
					Controlling TVs with the   
					remote 21   
					Easy Setup 104   
					
					
					
					“Edit Playlist” 63   
					“Edit Scene” 63   
					Enter characters 60   
					EP mode 76   
					“Copy” 66   
					A 
					
					“A-B Erase” 58   
					
					
					ANGLE 36   
					Copy-Free 47   
					Copy-Never 47   
					Copy-Once 47   
					Counter 69   
					
					“Erase All Titles” 67   
					
					CPRM 30   
					F 
					“Audio” 102   
					“Create Dubbing List” 87   
					“Create Playlist” 62   
					Creating chapters 49   
					“Factory Setting” 104   
					
					
					Feature settings 100   
					Finalizing 88   
					“Audio (HDMI)” 99   
					Audio cords 18   
					“Audio DRC” 99   
					Audio settings 98   
					“Auto Play” 101   
					“Auto Repeat” 101   
					D 
					“Digital Out” 98   
					“Format DVD-RW” 101   
					
					“Front Display” 103   
					Front panel 114   
					
					“Disc Format” 67   
					“Disc Information” 67   
					“Disc Menu” 102   
					“Disc Name” 67   
					“Disc Protect” 67   
					
					Disc types 30   
					B 
					Batteries 20   
					“Black Level” 97   
					“Brand Code” 101   
					Front panel display 117   
					H 
					Handling discs 110   
					
					“HDMI Resolution” 96   
					C 
					Cable box 13   
					Display   
					Cable box brand 121   
					Cable box brand code 121   
					“Ch. Digit lock” 101   
					Changing or canceling timer   
					
					Chapter 118   
					“Chapter Erase” 58   
					“Check” 63   
					Child Lock 38   
					front panel display 117   
					Setup Display 94   
					
					
					“Downmix” 99   
					
					
					
					
					I 
					
					
					Interlace format 119   
					J 
					JPEG image files 42   
					Cleaning discs 110   
					Cleaning the video heads 111   
					CLEAR 69   
					Clock Set settings 95   
					“Combine Titles” 64   
					
					“DV/D8 Dubbing” 92   
					“DV/D8 One Touch   
					Dubbing” 93   
					“DV/D8 Simple Dubbing” 92   
					“DVD Auto Chapter” 100   
					DVD Editing 56   
					L 
					“Language” 102   
					Language abbreviation 120   
					LINE 1 IN 13   
					LINE 2 IN 27   
					
					126   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				“Progressive” 97   
					Progressive format 119   
					“Protect” 58   
					“Subtitle” 102   
					“Surround” 99   
					
					
					
					M 
					MENU 35   
					Menu   
					Top menu 35   
					“Mode for SET button” 102   
					“Modify” 64   
					“Move” 65   
					Q 
					System Menu 10   
					
					T 
					R 
					“Tape Length” 101   
					Tape speed 75   
					Rear panel 117   
					
					MP3 audio tracks 41   
					
					
					
					recordable discs 30   
					recording format 30   
					recording mode 46   
					tape speed 75   
					
					
					
					
					Title 119   
					N 
					
					
					“Title Dubbing” 87   
					
					
					Title List 39   
					
					TOP MENU 35   
					Track 119   
					TRACKING 70   
					Tracking adjustment 70   
					Troubleshooting 105   
					“TV Type” 96   
					
					
					Region code 34   
					
					
					
					Resetting 104   
					O 
					One Touch Dubbing 93   
					On-screen display   
					OPTIONS menu 11   
					Setup Display 94   
					Sub-menu 11   
					System Menu 10   
					OPTIONS 11   
					Options settings 102   
					
					
					
					Resume Play 38   
					Rotate 42   
					S 
					Safety tab 75   
					U 
					
					Satellite receiver 13   
					Satellite receiver brand code   
					
					
					“Scene Dubbing” 87   
					Searching   
					for “Chapter” 40   
					for “Title” 40   
					for “Track” 40   
					Time Search 40   
					
					
					“Unfinalize” 89   
					Unrecordable pictures 47   
					P 
					“Parental” 103   
					V 
					Parental Control 38   
					Parts and controls 114   
					
					PBC 38   
					“Picture Control” 97   
					
					“VCR Function” 101   
					“Video (HDMI)” 96   
					VIDEO CD 33   
					Video mode 30   
					Video settings 96   
					VR mode 30   
					Playable discs 33   
					
					JPEG image files 42   
					MP3 audio tracks 41   
					Resume Play 38   
					
					
					Power cord 20   
					
					Z 
					Settings 94   
					Zoom 42   
					Setup Display 94   
					“Simple Dubbing” 86   
					
					SP mode 76   
					
					
					Sub-menu 11   
					Program Dubbing 86   
					SUBTITLE 36   
					127   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Índice   
					Este manual muestra la configuración básica y el funcionamiento de la videograbadora-grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					Para obtener más información, consulte el manual de instrucciones en inglés.   
					Conexiones y ajustes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3   
					Conexión de la grabadora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3   
					Paso 1: Desembalaje. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3   
					
					Paso 3: Conexión al televisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5   
					Paso 4: Conexión del cable de alimentación. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8   
					Paso 5: Preparación del mando a distancia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8   
					Paso 6: Configuración fácil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9   
					Funcionamiento básico   
					
					Reproducción de discos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13   
					Opciones de reproducción . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14   
					Reproducción de un título de la Lista títulos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16   
					
					Antes de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17   
					
					
					
					
					Opciones de reproducción . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23   
					
					Antes de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24   
					Grabación de la videograbadora desde un equipo conectado que no tiene   
					temporizador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25   
					
					
					
					
					ES   
					2 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				No es posible grabar en esta grabadora si tiene:   
					– un decodificador de cable o un receptor vía   
					satélite sin salidas de audio/video.   
					Conexiones y ajustes   
					– cable sin decodificador de cable.   
					– sólo antena (sin cable de televisión).   
					En los casos mencionados anteriormente, póngase   
					en contacto con la empresa suministradora para   
					consultar si podrían proporcionarle un   
					decodificador de cable o un receptor vía satélite   
					compatible.   
					Conexión de la grabadora   
					Siga los pasos del 1 al 6 para conectar y realizar   
					los ajustes de la grabadora.   
					Notas   
					• Enchufe los cables firmemente para prevenir   
					perturbaciones no deseadas.   
					• Consulte las instrucciones suministradas con los   
					componentes que va a conectar.   
					• No es posible conectar la grabadora a un televisor que   
					no disponga de toma de entrada de video.   
					• Asegúrese de desconectar el cable de alimentación de   
					cada componente antes de realizar las conexiones. No   
					conecte el cable de alimentación hasta haber llegado al   
					
					
					Utilización de la función de control   
					del decodificador de cable/receptor   
					vía satélite   
					Esta función permite que la grabadora controle el   
					decodificador de cable o el receptor vía satélite   
					mediante el controlador del decodificador   
					suministrado. También es posible utilizar el   
					mando a distancia de la grabadora para cambiar   
					canales en el decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite, siempre que ambos estén encendidos.   
					Para utilizar la función de control del   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite, es   
					necesario:   
					Paso 1: Desembalaje   
					– comprobar el código de marca del decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite. Consulte “Cable   
					Box/Satellite Receiver Brand Code” en el   
					manual de instrucciones en inglés (página 121).   
					– conectar el controlador del decodificador   
					
					– ajustar el número del código de marca y la   
					entrada de la grabadora que está conectada al   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite   
					
					Compruebe que dispone de los siguientes   
					elementos:   
					• Cable de audio/video   
					(clavija fono × 3 y clavija fono × 3) (1)   
					• Mando a distancia (1)   
					• Controlador del decodificador (1)   
					• Pilas de tamaño AA (R6) (2)   
					Paso 2: Conexión del   
					decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite   
					(sintonizador)   
					Una vez configurado el control del decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite, compruebe que la   
					grabadora controla correctamente el dispositivo   
					
					Esta grabadora no incluye un sintonizador de   
					televisión.   
					Para grabar programas de televisión con este   
					dispositivo, es necesario conectarlo a un   
					sintonizador que tenga tomas de salida de audio/   
					video.   
					ES   
					Si ha estado utilizando la videograbadora   
					conectada a una antena, conecte esta grabadora a   
					la videograbadora mediante un cable de audio/   
					video. De este modo, podrá grabar programas de   
					televisión.   
					ES   
					3 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Conexión del decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite y del controlador   
					del decodificador   
					Conecte las tomas LINE IN mediante un cable de audio/video.   
					Con esta conexión, puede grabar cualquier canal del decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite.   
					Asegúrese de que el receptor vía satélite o decodificador de cable está encendido.   
					Para ver programas por cable o vía satélite, debe hacer coincidir la fuente de entrada de la grabadora (L1)   
					con la toma de entrada que está conectada al decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite (LINE 1 IN).   
					Coloque el controlador del decodificador cerca del sensor remoto del decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite.   
					Pared   
					Controlador   
					del   
					Decodificadorde   
					decodificador   
					cable/receptor   
					vía satélite   
					(suministrado)   
					Cable de antena   
					(no suministrado)   
					AUDIO   
					OUT   
					R 
					VIDEO   
					OUT   
					ANT IN   
					TO TV   
					L 
					a la entrada de   
					antena   
					Televisor   
					Cable de audio/video   
					(no suministrado)   
					LINE   
					1 
					IN   
					VIDEO   
					a SET TOP   
					BOX CONTROL   
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					CONTROL   
					AUDIO   
					a la toma   
					LINE 1 IN   
					Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Flujo de señales   
					ES   
					4 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Paso 3: Conexión al televisor   
					Conecte el cable de audio/video suministrado a las tomas LINE OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) de la   
					grabadora.   
					Para disfrutar de una calidad de imagen superior, conecte un cable de S video (no suministrado) en lugar   
					de la clavija amarilla (video). Si utiliza esta conexión, asegúrese de conectar el cable de audio a las tomas   
					LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R).   
					INPUT   
					INPUT   
					Televisor o   
					proyector   
					AUDIO   
					S VIDEO   
					R 
					L 
					VIDEO   
					(rojo)   
					(blanco) (amarillo)   
					Cable de audio/video   
					(suministrado)   
					S VIDEO OUT LINE 1 IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO VIDEO   
					Cable de S video   
					(no suministrado)   
					(amarillo)   
					(blanco)   
					(rojo)   
					L 
					R 
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					a LINE OUT   
					a S VIDEO OUT   
					(VIDEO/AUDIO L/R)   
					Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Flujo de señales   
					Notas   
					• No realice la conexión a la tomas S VIDEO OUT y LINE OUT (VIDEO) amarilla a la vez.   
					• Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya   
					que la toma S VIDEO OUT sólo emitirá señales de DVD video.   
					• No conecte las tomas de salida de audio del televisor a las tomas LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) a la vez. De lo contrario, se   
					producirá ruido no deseado en los altavoces del televisor.   
					ES   
					,continúa   
					5 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Si el televisor dispone de una toma de entrada de HDMI   
					Conecte la toma de salida HDMI* OUT mediante un cable HDMI certificado (no suministrado).   
					Disfrutará de imágenes y sonido de alta calidad. El indicador de HDMI se ilumina en el panel frontal   
					cuando la grabadora emite señales a través de la toma de salida HDMI OUT.   
					Asegúrese de apagar la grabadora antes de conectar un cable HDMI.   
					Televisor o   
					proyector   
					HDMI IN   
					a la entrada de HDMI   
					Cable HDMI (no suministrado)   
					HDMI OUT   
					a HDMI OUT   
					Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO OUT   
					Y 
					VIDEO   
					L 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					: Flujo de señales   
					* Esta grabadora de DVD incorpora la tecnología de High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™).   
					HDMI, el logotipo de HDMI y High-Definition Multimedia Interface son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales   
					registradas de HDMI Licensing LLC.   
					Notas   
					• No es posible conectar la toma de salida HDMI OUT a tomas DVI que no sean compatibles con HDCP (por ejemplo,   
					tomas DVI en pantallas de PC).   
					• Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya   
					que la toma de salida HDMI OUT sólo emitirán señales de DVD video.   
					ES   
					6 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Si el televisor tiene tomas de entrada de video componente   
					Conecte las tomas COMPONENT VIDEO OUT mediante un cable de video componente (no   
					suministrado) o tres cables de video (no suministrados) del mismo tipo y longitud. Disfrutará de una fiel   
					reproducción del color y de imágenes de alta calidad.   
					Si utiliza esta conexión, asegúrese de conectar el cable de audio a las tomas LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R).   
					COMPONENT VIDEO IN   
					INPUT   
					Televisor o   
					proyector   
					AUDIO   
					L 
					R 
					Y 
					PB   
					PR   
					(verde) (azul) (rojo)   
					(blanco) (rojo)   
					Cable de audio/video   
					(suministrado)   
					Cable de video componente   
					(no suministrado)   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					(verde)   
					Y 
					(blanco)   
					(rojo)   
					(azul)   
					L 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					(rojo)   
					P 
					R 
					a LINE OUT   
					(AUDIO L/R)   
					a COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					COMPONENT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					S 
					VIDEO OUT LINE   
					1 
					IN LINE OUT   
					VIDEO   
					VIDEO   
					L 
					Y 
					L 
					R 
					P 
					P 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					R 
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					AUDIO   
					AUDIO   
					Videograbadora-grabadora de DVD   
					: Flujo de señales   
					Nota   
					Durante la grabación de discos DVD, no es posible visualizar imágenes en VHS mediante la pulsación de VIDEO, ya   
					que las tomas COMPONENT VIDEO OUT sólo emitirán señales de DVD video.   
					ES   
					7 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Paso 4: Conexión del cable Paso 5: Preparación del   
					de alimentación   
					mando a distancia   
					Enchufe los cables de alimentación de la   
					grabadora y del televisor a una toma de ca. A   
					continuación, debe esperar unos instantes   
					antes de utilizar la grabadora. Podrá   
					utilizarla sólo después de que la pantalla del panel   
					frontal se ilumine y la grabadora pase al modo de   
					espera.   
					La grabadora puede controlarse con el mando a   
					distancia suministrado.   
					Inserte dos pilas de tamaño AA (R6) haciendo   
					coincidir sus extremos 3 y # con las marcas del   
					interior del compartimiento de las pilas.   
					Asegúrese de cerrar la tapa de las pilas   
					correctamente. Cuando utilice el mando a   
					distancia, oriéntelo hacia el sensor remoto   
					grabadora.   
					de la   
					COMPONENT   
					AUDIO OUT   
					VIDEO OUT   
					L 
					Y 
					P 
					P 
					R 
					B 
					R 
					SETTOP   
					BOX   
					HDMI OUT   
					CONTROL   
					OPTICAL COAXIAL   
					DIGITAL AUDIO OUT   
					a la toma de ca <   
					Notas   
					• Utilice correctamente las pilas para evitar posibles   
					daños por fugas y corrosión. No toque el líquido   
					directamente con las manos si se produjera alguna   
					fuga. Respete las indicaciones siguientes:   
					– No utilice una pila nueva con otra usada, ni pilas de   
					distintos fabricantes.   
					– No intente cargar las pilas.   
					– Si no tiene intención de utilizar el mando a distancia   
					durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, extraiga   
					las pilas.   
					– Si se produce una fuga de las pilas, seque todo líquido   
					que haya en el compartimiento de las pilas e inserte   
					pilas nuevas.   
					• No exponga el sensor remoto (marcado con   
					en el   
					panel frontal) a luz intensa, tal como la luz directa del   
					sol o de aparatos de iluminación. La grabadora podría   
					no responder al control del mando a distancia.   
					• Con un uso normal, la duración de las pilas es   
					aproximadamente de tres a seis meses.   
					• No deje el mando a distancia en un lugar   
					excesivamente cálido o húmedo.   
					• No deje caer ningún objeto extraño dentro de la carcasa   
					del mando a distancia, especialmente cuando   
					reemplace las pilas.   
					ES   
					8 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				3 Cambie el selector de entrada del televisor   
					para que la señal de la grabadora aparezca   
					en la pantalla del televisor.   
					Paso 6: Configuración fácil   
					Aparecerá el siguiente mensaje “Initial setting   
					necessary to operate the DVD recorder will be   
					made. You can change them later using   
					setup.” (“Se realizarán los ajustes iniciales   
					necesarios para usar la grabadora DVD. Podrá   
					cambiarlos posteriormente utilizando la   
					configuración.”).   
					• Si no aparece este mensaje, presione   
					SYSTEM MENU y seleccione   
					“Configuración fácil” en la pantalla   
					“Configuración” para ejecutar la   
					Siga los pasos que se indican a continuación para   
					realizar el mínimo número de ajustes básicos   
					necesarios para utilizar la grabadora. Si no   
					completa la Configuración fácil, aparecerá cada   
					vez que encienda la grabadora.   
					Los ajustes se realizan en el orden siguiente.   
					Ajuste del idioma de las indicaciones en pantalla   
					m 
					Ajuste del control del decodificador de cable/receptor sat   
					Configuración fácil.   
					m 
					4 Presione ENTER.   
					Ajuste del reloj   
					Aparece la pantalla de configuración que le   
					permite seleccionar el idioma utilizado en las   
					indicaciones en pantalla.   
					m 
					Ajuste del tipo de televisor   
					Easy Setup   
					No Disc   
					m 
					Ajuste de la conexión de audio   
					Select the screen language.   
					m 
					English   
					Français   
					Español   
					Fin   
					"/1   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Botones   
					numéricos   
					5 Seleccione un idioma y presione ENTER.   
					Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para el   
					control del decodificador de cable/receptor   
					vía satélite.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					No Disc Configuración fácil   
					O RETURN   
					¿Desea controlar el decodificador   
					con esta grabadora?   
					(Todo cambio al ajuste actual borrará   
					los ajustes del temporizador.)   
					Sí   
					No   
					6 Seleccione si se utiliza o no el control del   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite; a continuación, presione ENTER.   
					Si desea utilizar el control del decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite (página 3),   
					seleccione “Sí”.   
					1 Encienda el televisor.   
					2 Presione "/1.   
					La grabadora se enciende.   
					De lo contrario, seleccione “No”, y vaya al   
					paso 10.   
					ES   
					,continúa   
					9 
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				7 Presione los botones numéricos para   
					introducir el código de marca del   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite.   
					10Presione M/m para establecer el mes y   
					presione ,.   
					Establezca el día, el año, la hora, los minutos   
					y AM/PM del mismo modo y, a continuación,   
					presione ENTER. El día de la semana se   
					ajusta automáticamente.   
					Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para   
					seleccionar el tamaño de la imagen del   
					televisor conectado.   
					Consulte “Cable Box/Satellite Receiver   
					Brand Code” en el manual de instrucciones en   
					inglés (página 121).   
					Configuración fácil   
					No Disc   
					Introduzca el código de marca   
					del decodificador.   
					11 Seleccione el ajuste que coincida con su   
					tipo de televisor.   
					Configuración fácil   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Aceptar   
					Cancelar   
					Seleccione el tipo de pantalla de su TV.   
					16 : 9   
					4 : 3 Tipo buzón   
					4 : 3 Explo pan   
					• Para volver a introducir el número del   
					código, seleccione “Cancelar” y vuelva al   
					paso 6.   
					8 Seleccione “Aceptar” y presione ENTER.   
					“16:9”: para televisores con pantalla   
					panorámica o televisores estándar con modo   
					panorámico.   
					Configuración fácil   
					No Disc   
					Seleccione la línea de entrada a   
					“4:3 Tipo buzón”: para televisores estándar.   
					Muestra imágenes “panorámicas” con franjas   
					en las secciones superior e inferior de la   
					pantalla.   
					la que ha conectado el decodificador.   
					Línea1   
					Línea2   
					“4:3 Explo pan”: para televisores estándar.   
					Muestra automáticamente imágenes   
					“panorámicas” que ocupan toda la pantalla y   
					corta las secciones que no caben.   
					9 
					Seleccione la entrada de audio/video de la   
					grabadora (“Línea1” o “Línea2”) que está   
					conectada al decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite y, a continuación,   
					presione ENTER.   
					12 Presione ENTER.   
					Aparece la pantalla de configuración para   
					seleccionar el tipo de señal Dolby Digital.   
					Configuración fácil   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Aparecerá la pantalla de configuración para   
					ajustar el reloj.   
					Dolby Digital   
					Configuración fácil   
					No Disc   
					12:00 AM   
					D-PCM   
					Dolby Digital   
					Ajuste la hora y la fecha manualmente.   
					Mes   
					01   
					Día   
					01   
					Año   
					2007   
					Lun   
					Hora   
					12   
					Min   
					00   
					AM/PM   
					AM   
					13 Seleccione el tipo de señal Dolby Digital   
					que desea enviar al amplificador   
					(receptor).   
					: 
					Si el amplificador (receptor) de AV cuenta   
					con un decodificador Dolby Digital,   
					seleccione “Dolby Digital”. En caso   
					contrario, seleccione “D-PCM”.   
					ES   
					10   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				14 Presione ENTER.   
					Comprobar el ajuste de control del   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite   
					Aparece la pantalla de configuración para   
					seleccionar el tipo de señal DTS.   
					Configuración fácil   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador   
					DTS   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					Sí   
					2 Oriente el mando a distancia de la   
					grabadora hacia ésta (no hacia el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite).   
					No   
					3 Presione CH +/– y compruebe que el canal   
					cambia en la ventana del decodificador de   
					cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					15 Seleccione si desea o no enviar una señal   
					DTS al amplificador (receptor), y presione   
					ENTER.   
					Si el amplificador (receptor) de AV cuenta   
					con un decodificador DTS, seleccione “Sí”.   
					En caso contrario, seleccione “No”.   
					4 Presione los botones numéricos y   
					compruebe que el canal cambia en la   
					ventana del decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite.   
					16 Presione ENTER cuando aparezca   
					“Finalizar”.   
					Si no consigue que la grabadora controle el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite   
					Vuelva a ejecutar la configuración fácil y   
					
					Compruebe la conexión y coloque el controlador   
					del decodificador cerca del decodificador de   
					cable/receptor vía satélite (página 3).   
					La Configuración fácil ha finalizado. Se han   
					realizado todas las conexiones y operaciones   
					de configuración.   
					Si utiliza el control de decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite, compruebe que el control   
					
					Configuración fácil   
					10:10 AM   
					No Disc   
					Si el decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite   
					sigue sin funcionar correctamente con la   
					grabadora, póngase en contacto con la empresa   
					suministradora para que le proporcionen un   
					decodificador de cable o receptor vía satélite   
					compatible.   
					Finalizada la configuración fácil.   
					Finalizar   
					Arreglar el controlador del decodificador para   
					el decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite   
					Una vez confirmado que el controlador del   
					decodificador controla el decodificador de cable o   
					receptor vía satélite, colóquelo en su sitio.   
					Para volver a la indicación anterior   
					Presione O RETURN.   
					1 
					Coloque la cinta de doble capa suministrada   
					en el controlador del decodificador.   
					Retire las partes de apoyo de la cinta de doble   
					capa.   
					z Observación   
					Si desea ejecutar la Configuración fácil de nuevo,   
					presione SYSTEM MENU y seleccione “Configuración   
					fácil” en la pantalla “Configuración”.   
					Nota   
					Para grabar programas de televisión utilizando el   
					temporizador, deberá ajustar el reloj con exactitud.   
					ES   
					,continúa   
					11   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				2 
					Colóquelo de manera que el controlador del   
					decodificador esté cerca del sensor de control   
					remoto del decodificador de cable/receptor   
					vía satélite.   
					ES   
					12   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				z Observaciones   
					• Es posible reproducir DATA CD o DATA DVD con   
					pistas de audio en formato MP3 o archivos de imagen   
					en formato JPEG.   
					Reproducción de DVD   
					• Si inserta un DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD o un CD, la   
					reproducción se iniciará automáticamente en función   
					del disco.   
					• Al reproducir un DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R,   
					DVD-R y DVD-RAM, podrá seleccionar el título del   
					
					Reproducción de discos   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					DVD RAM VCD   
					CD   
					DATA CD DATA DVD   
					• Cuando utilice un DVD-RAM con un cartucho,   
					extraiga el disco del mismo.   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					DVD   
					1 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					Nota   
					4 
					7 
					6 
					9 
					Para reproducir un disco grabado con otro equipo en esta   
					grabadora, primero finalice el disco en el equipo de   
					grabación.   
					TOP MENU   
					MENU   
					Utilización del menú del DVD   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVideo   
					DVD   
					Cuando reproduzca un DVD VIDEO, o un   
					DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Modo Video), DVD+R o   
					DVD-R (Modo Video) finalizado, podrá acceder   
					al menú del disco presionando TOP MENU o   
					MENU.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					2 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un   
					disco en la bandeja de discos.   
					La cara de reproducción debe mirar   
					hacia abajo   
					3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la   
					bandeja de discos.   
					Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la   
					pantalla del panel frontal.   
					4 Presione H PLAY.   
					Se inicia la reproducción.   
					Para detener la reproducción   
					Presione x STOP.   
					ES   
					13   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				Opciones de reproducción   
					Z OPEN/CLOSE   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					ANGLE   
					SUBTITLE   
					AUDIO   
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE   
					. PREV   
					> NEXT   
					H PLAY   
					X PAUSE   
					Botón   
					Operación   
					Disco   
					Z OPEN/CLOSE   
					AUDIO   
					Detiene la reproducción y abre la bandeja de discos.   
					Todos los discos   
					Selecciona una de las pistas de audio grabadas en el   
					disco cuando se presiona varias veces.   
					- 
					- 
					RVR   
					RWVR   
					DVD   
					VCD   
					- 
					- 
					: selecciona el sonido principal o   
					RWVR   
					RVR   
					secundario.   
					: selecciona la fuente de audio.   
					DVD   
					VCD   
					: selecciona las pistas de audio estéreo o   
					monoaurales.   
					. 
					SUBTITLE   
					ANGLE   
					Selecciona el idioma de los subtítulos cuando se   
					presiona varias veces.   
					DVD   
					DVD   
					Selecciona un ángulo cuando se presiona varias veces.   
					Si se grabaron varios ángulos (multiángulo) de una   
					escena en el disco, aparece “   
					panel frontal.   
					” en la pantalla del   
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE   
					• Vuelve a reproducir o avanza rápidamente una   
					escena si se presiona durante la reproducción.   
					• Se desplaza al fotograma anterior o siguiente si se   
					presiona en el modo de pausa.   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					RVR   
					R 
					RAM   
					DVD   
					ES   
					14   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Botón   
					Operación   
					Disco   
					. PREV/   
					NEXT >   
					• Se desplaza al principio del título/capítulo/escena/   
					pista actual o siguiente e inicia la reproducción   
					cuando se presiona durante la reproducción.   
					• Se desplaza al principio del título/capítulo/escena/   
					pista anterior si se presiona .PREV en los   
					3 segundos posteriores al inicio de un título/capítulo/   
					escena/pista.   
					Todos los discos   
					Avanza o retrocede rápidamente el disco cuando se   
					presiona durante la reproducción.   
					La velocidad de búsqueda cambia cada vez que   
					presiona el botón:   
					Todos los discos   
					(retroceso rápido/   
					avance rápido)   
					*1   
					FF1 con sonido   
					(Explorar audio) está   
					disponible para DVD   
					con pistas de sonido   
					Dolby Digital.   
					retroceso rápido avance rápido   
					*1   
					FR1 T t FF1   
					*2   
					*2   
					*2   
					FR2 y FF2 no están   
					FR2 T T t t FF2   
					FR3 T T T t t t FF3   
					*3   
					*3   
					disponibles para   
					MP3.   
					FR3 y FF3 sólo están   
					*3   
					disponibles para   
					DVD y VIDEO CD.   
					Reproduce a cámara lenta cuando se presiona en el   
					modo de pausa.   
					La velocidad de reproducción cambia cada vez que se   
					presiona el botón:   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					(lento)   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					RVR   
					R 
					* 
					RAM VCD   
					DVD   
					* Sólo dirección de   
					reproducción   
					retroceso a cámara lenta avance a cámara lenta   
					T 
					t 
					T T t t   
					T T T t t t   
					X PAUSE   
					Hace una pausa en la reproducción.   
					Si ésta dura más de cinco minutos, la reproducción se   
					inicia automáticamente.   
					Todos los discos   
					Para reanudar la reproducción normal después de reproducir a diferentes velocidades, presione   
					H PLAY.   
					ES   
					15   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				C Información del título:   
					Muestra el número del título, su nombre,   
					la fecha y el modo de grabación.   
					Reproducción de un título   
					de la Lista títulos   
					“ 
					” indica que se trata de un título   
					protegido, mientras que “ ” indica que   
					está desprotegido.   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RW   
					RAM   
					D Reloj   
					El menú Lista títulos muestra los títulos de los   
					programas del disco.   
					4 Seleccione el título y presione ENTER.   
					Aparece el submenú.   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Seleccione “Reproducir” y presione   
					ENTER.   
					La reproducción comienza desde el título   
					seleccionado en el disco.   
					TOP MENU   
					MENU   
					ORIGINAL/   
					PLAYLIST   
					TITLE LIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Acerca de las listas de títulos para DVD-RW   
					(Modo VR) y DVD-R (Modo VR)   
					Es posible cambiar la lista de títulos para que se   
					muestre un título original o una Playlist.   
					Presione ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST varias veces   
					mientras se muestra el menú Lista títulos para   
					seleccionar “Lista títulos (Original)” o “Playlist”.   
					Para quitar la lista de títulos   
					Presione TITLE LIST.   
					1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					z Observación   
					También es posible cambiar la lista de títulos de   
					DVD-RAM para mostrar un original o Playlist.   
					2 Coloque un disco en la bandeja de discos.   
					3 Presione TITLE LIST.   
					Ejemplo: DVD-RW (modo VR)   
					Notas   
					• La lista de títulos no aparece con DVD-RW (Modo   
					Video), DVD+R o DVD-R (Modo Video) que hayan   
					finalizado. Para visualizar un título, presione TOP   
					
					• Es posible que la lista de títulos no aparezca en discos   
					creados en otras grabadoras de DVD.   
					Lista títulos (Original)   
					1/4 No. Título   
					10:10 AM   
					Long.   
					Edit.   
					> 
					01 LINE 1   
					02 LINE 1   
					03 LINE 1   
					04 LINE 1   
					01:29:03   
					00:31:23   
					01:59:00   
					00:58:56   
					> 
					> 
					> 
					• Las letras que no pueden mostrarse se reemplazan por   
					T 
					LINE 1   
					“ ”.   
					* 
					May/02/2007   
					08:00 PM   
					A Tipo de disco:   
					Muestra el tipo de disco.   
					También muestra los tipos de título   
					(original o Playlist) para DVD-RW   
					(Modo VR), DVD-R (Modo VR) y   
					DVD-RAM.   
					B Imagen en miniatura de película   
					ES   
					16   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Modo de grabación y tiempo de grabación   
					La siguiente tabla es una guía aproximada del   
					tiempo de grabación en un DVD (4,7 GB).   
					Grabación de DVD   
					Modo de grabación   
					Tiempo de   
					grabación   
					(minutos)   
					aproximado   
					Antes de grabar   
					Antes de empezar la grabación…   
					Compruebe que la grabadora está conectada a un   
					sintonizador como, por ejemplo, un decodificador   
					de cable o receptor vía satélite (página 3).   
					Consulte también el manual de instrucciones del   
					sintonizador.   
					HQ (alta calidad)   
					60   
					HSP   
					R 
					90   
					SP (Modo estándar)   
					120   
					150   
					180   
					240   
					360   
					480   
					LSP   
					ESP   
					LP   
					r 
					r 
					r 
					r 
					Modo de grabación   
					Esta grabadora dispone de ocho modos de   
					grabación distintos, al igual que los modos de   
					grabación SP o EP de las videograbadoras.   
					Seleccione el modo de grabación en función del   
					tiempo y la calidad de imagen deseada. Por   
					ejemplo, si la calidad de la imagen es su principal   
					prioridad, seleccione el modo “HQ” (alta calidad).   
					Si su principal prioridad es el tiempo de grabación,   
					el modo “SLP” puede ser su alternativa.   
					EP   
					SLP (Larga duración)   
					z Observación   
					El tiempo de grabación aproximado para los discos   
					DVD+R DL (doble capa) es el que se indica a   
					continuación:   
					HQ: 1 hora y 48 minutos   
					HSP: 2 horas y 42 minutos   
					SP: 3 horas y 37 minutos   
					LSP: 4 horas y 31 minutos   
					ESP: 5 horas y 25 minutos   
					LP: 7 horas y 14 minutos   
					Presione REC MODE varias veces para   
					cambiar los modos de grabación.   
					EP: 10 horas y 51 minutos   
					SLP: 14 horas y 28 minutos   
					Deseo grabar con la   
					mejor calidad de imagen   
					posible, por eso   
					seleccionaré HQ.   
					Notas   
					• En modos de grabación distintos a HQ, la grabadora   
					comprime los datos de audio/video antes de la   
					grabación. Dado que las escenas de movimientos   
					rápidos o la existencia de ruido en la imagen requieren   
					que las tasas de compresión disminuyan, el tamaño de   
					los datos grabados aumenta y el tiempo de grabación   
					disponible se acorta. En la grabación de estas   
					imágenes, se recomienda un modo de grabación que   
					proporcione un tiempo de grabación más largo.   
					• Los siguientes casos pueden producir inexactitudes en   
					el tiempo de grabación.   
					– Grabación de imágenes con ruido de imagen o   
					escenas de movimiento rápido.   
					– Grabación de un programa con recepción defectuosa,   
					o una fuente de programa o video con imagen de baja   
					calidad   
					– Grabación en un disco ya editado   
					– Grabación de imágenes fijas o sonido únicamente   
					• Debido a que el modo de grabación de títulos grabados   
					se calcula después del muestreo de datos grabados   
					durante la reproducción, es posible que se muestre   
					diferente del modo que seleccionó durante la   
					grabación. Sin embargo, la grabación real se realizó   
					correctamente en el modo seleccionado.   
					ES   
					,continúa   
					17   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
					 
				Imágenes que no pueden grabarse   
					Grabación de DVD desde un   
					equipo conectado que no   
					tiene temporizador   
					En esta grabadora no pueden grabarse imágenes   
					con protección contra copias. La grabación se   
					detiene cuando se detecta una señal de protección   
					contra copias.   
					Señales de   
					control   
					Discos grabables   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					Es posible grabar programas de televisión en la   
					grabadora a través del decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite conectado.   
					de copias   
					Copy-Free   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					RWVR RWVideo   
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					+ 
					R 
					RVR   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					Copy-Once   
					- 
					RWVR   
					VIDEO   
					CH +/–   
					DVD   
					Ver.1.1, Ver.1.2 con CPRM*   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					- 
					RVR   
					INPUT   
					Ver.2.0, Ver.2.1 con CPRM*   
					Copy-Never   
					Ninguna   
					* El disco grabado sólo puede reproducirse en un equipo   
					compatible con CPRM.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					z REC   
					1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					2 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un   
					disco grabable en la bandeja de discos.   
					La cara de grabación debe mirar hacia   
					abajo   
					4 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la   
					bandeja de discos.   
					Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la   
					pantalla del panel frontal.   
					ES   
					18   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				5 Presione CH +/– o INPUT varias veces para   
					seleccionar el canal o la fuente de entrada   
					que desee grabar.   
					Notas   
					• Es posible que la grabación no se inicie   
					inmediatamente después de presionar z REC.   
					• No se puede cambiar el modo de grabación mientras   
					graba o durante una pausa de grabación.   
					• Si se produce un corte en el suministro eléctrico, se   
					eliminará el programa que se está grabando.   
					• No es posible cambiar la fuente de entrada durante la   
					grabación.   
					• Cuando utilice el control de decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite, seleccione el   
					canal presionando CH +/– en el mando a   
					distancia de esta grabadora. La entrada de la   
					grabadora se cambia a la entrada conectada   
					(LINE1 o LINE2). También es posible   
					utilizar los botones numéricos.   
					• Cuando no utilice el control de   
					Grabación mediante la función   
					Quick Timer (Grabación con   
					temporizador presionando un solo   
					botón)   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite,   
					seleccione la entrada conectada (LINE1 o   
					LINE2) presionando INPUT y, a   
					continuación, seleccione el canal en el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					Puede ajustar la grabadora para que grabe en   
					incrementos de 30 minutos.   
					6 Presione REC MODE varias veces para   
					seleccionar el modo de grabación.   
					La pantalla cambiará en la pantalla del   
					televisor del modo siguiente:   
					1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					2 Presione z REC varias veces para definir   
					HQ   
					HSP   
					EP   
					SP   
					LP   
					LSP   
					ESP   
					la duración.   
					Cada vez que presione el botón, aumentará el   
					tiempo en 30 minutos, hasta un máximo de   
					ocho horas*.   
					SLP   
					Para obtener más detalles sobre el modo de   
					
					(Grabación   
					normal)   
					0:30   
					1:00   
					7:30 8:00   
					7 Presione z REC.   
					Comienza la grabación.   
					“c” y “OTR” se iluminan y el tiempo de   
					grabación restante aparece en la pantalla del   
					panel frontal.   
					La grabación continúa hasta que usted la   
					detiene o el disco se llena.   
					Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite encendido y no cambie el canal que   
					está grabando.   
					Cuando el contador llega a “0:00”, la   
					grabadora detiene la grabación y se apaga.   
					* 14 horas 30 minutos para discos DVD+R DL (doble   
					capa).   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Presione x STOP.   
					Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos   
					segundos en detener la grabación.   
					Para cancelar el Quick Timer   
					Presione z REC varias veces hasta que aparezca   
					el contador en la pantalla del panel frontal. La   
					grabadora vuelve al modo de grabación normal.   
					Para hacer una pausa en la grabación   
					Presione X PAUSE.   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Para reiniciar la grabación, presione X PAUSE de   
					nuevo.   
					Presione x STOP dos veces.   
					Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos   
					segundos en detener la grabación.   
					Para ver una cinta VHS durante la grabación   
					Presione VIDEO para utilizar la videograbadora,   
					inserte una cinta y, a continuación, presione   
					H PLAY.   
					ES   
					19   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				3 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar la   
					bandeja de discos.   
					Grabación con   
					Espere hasta que “LOAD” desaparezca de la   
					pantalla del panel frontal.   
					temporizador de DVD desde   
					4 Presione TIMER.   
					un equipo conectado   
					Temporizador – Estándar   
					10:10 AM   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					No ec T 
					No.01   
					01  
					at 
					at   
					n 
					ore oe Edit.   
					Puede ajustar el temporizador para un total de   
					12 programas utilizando la grabación de DVD con   
					temporizador y la grabación de videograbadora   
					con temporizador con un máximo de un mes de   
					anticipación.   
					02Sop. Fecha InicioFin   
					Can   
					Modo   
					03  
					DVD   
					Hoy   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Línea1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					04  
					05  
					06  
					Tenga en cuenta que el tiempo de grabación   
					continua máximo de un único título es de 12 horas.   
					El contenido que supere este tiempo no se grabará.   
					5 Seleccione un elemento utilizando </,   
					Nota   
					y ajústelo utilizando M/m.   
					No opere el decodificador de cable ni el receptor vía   
					satélite justo antes ni durante una grabación con   
					temporizador, ya que ello puede impedir la grabación   
					correcta de un programa.   
					A “Sop.”: seleccione “DVD”.   
					B “Fecha”: ajusta la fecha mediante M.   
					Para grabar el mismo programa todos los   
					días o el mismo día todas las semanas,   
					presione m.   
					Z OPEN/   
					CLOSE   
					DVD   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					El elemento cambia de la siguiente   
					manera:   
					Hoy yDom-Sáb (de domingo a sábado)   
					y Lun-Sáb (de lunes a sábado) y   
					Lun-Vie (de lunes a viernes) y   
					Dom (todos los domingos) y   
					Lun (todos los lunes) y … y   
					Sáb (todos los sábados) y   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TIMER   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					1 mes más tarde y … y Hoy   
					C “Inicio”: establece la hora de inicio.   
					x STOP   
					D “Fin”: establece la hora de finalización.   
					E “Can”: selecciona el canal o la fuente   
					de entrada.   
					• Cuando utilice el control de   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite, seleccione el canal.   
					1 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					• Cuando no utilice el control de   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite, seleccione la entrada, LINE1 o   
					LINE2. Seleccione el canal en el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite conectado antes de iniciar la   
					grabación con temporizador.   
					2 Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE y coloque un   
					disco grabable en la bandeja de discos.   
					La cara de grabación debe mirar hacia   
					abajo   
					ES   
					20   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				F “Modo”: selecciona el modo de   
					
					Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo   
					
					Si se equivoca, seleccione el elemento y   
					cambie el ajuste.   
					6 Presione ENTER.   
					Aparecerá el menú Lista de temporizador.   
					Se ilumina el indicador c en la pantalla del   
					panel frontal, y la grabadora está lista para   
					comenzar a grabar.   
					• Si parpadea el indicador c en la pantalla del   
					panel frontal, compruebe que hay un disco   
					grabable insertado y que en el disco hay   
					suficiente espacio para la grabación.   
					7 Presione SYSTEM MENU para quitar el   
					menú.   
					No es necesario apagar la grabadora antes de   
					que empiece la grabación con temporizador.   
					Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite encendido y no cambie el canal   
					seleccionado hasta que la grabadora finalice la   
					grabación con temporizador.   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Presione x STOP dos veces.   
					Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos   
					segundos en detener la grabación.   
					Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo grab.   
					Si el espacio restante en el disco no es suficiente   
					para realizar la grabación actual, la grabadora   
					ajustará el modo de grabación automáticamente.   
					Seleccione “AUTO” en “Modo” al ajustar el   
					temporizador.   
					Notas   
					• Aunque lo ajuste correctamente, es posible que el   
					programa no se grabe si se está realizando otra   
					grabación o si se superpone otro ajuste de temporizador   
					con prioridad.   
					• Antes de comenzar la grabación con temporizador,   
					“TIMER REC” parpadea en la pantalla del panel   
					frontal.   
					• La grabadora se apaga automáticamente cuando   
					finaliza una grabación con temporizador, incluso   
					aunque la grabación comenzase con la grabadora   
					encendida.   
					• La grabadora no graba programas con señales Copy-   
					Never. Este tipo de grabaciones se detienen al cabo de   
					unos segundos.   
					ES   
					21   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Para detener la reproducción   
					Presione x STOP.   
					Reproducción de la videograbadora   
					Para expulsar la cinta   
					Presione Z OPEN/CLOSE.   
					Reproducción de una cinta   
					VHS   
					Para desconectar la alimentación durante el   
					rebobinado (parada del rebobinado)   
					Presione "/1 mientras la cinta se está   
					rebobinando. La alimentación se desactivará pero   
					la cinta seguirá rebobinándose hasta que llegue al   
					final.   
					Z OPEN/   
					"/1   
					VIDEO   
					CLOSE   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					Para emplear el contador de tiempo   
					Presione CLEAR en el punto que desee localizar   
					más tarde. El contador en la pantalla del panel   
					frontal se restablece a “0:00:00”.   
					Para mostrar el contador en la pantalla del   
					televisor, presione DISPLAY.   
					DISPLAY   
					CLEAR   
					Notas   
					H PLAY   
					• Durante la reproducción, la videograbadora detecta   
					automáticamente el sistema de grabación (S-VHS/   
					VHS) y el modo de grabación (SP o EP) de la cinta. Las   
					grabaciones en modo LP realizadas en otros equipos se   
					reproducirán, pero no se garantiza una buena calidad de   
					la imagen.   
					x STOP   
					• El contador se restablecerá a “0:00:00” siempre que se   
					vuelva a insertar una cinta.   
					• El contador deja de contar cuando llega a una parte sin   
					grabación.   
					• El contador se restablecerá a “0:00:00” una vez   
					transcurridas diez horas y se inicia de nuevo la cuenta.   
					• Si cambia al modo de videograbadora durante la   
					reproducción de un disco, la reproducción del DVD se   
					detendrá.   
					• La videograbadora no graba en formato S-VHS; sin   
					embargo, reproducirá las cintas S-VHS al detectar   
					automáticamente el formato, aunque la calidad de la   
					imagen será peor de lo normal en S-VHS. Es posible   
					que la imagen no resulte clara si se utilizan opciones de   
					reproducción tales como la cámara lenta, etc.   
					• No se garantiza la reproducción de las cintas S-VHS   
					grabadas en modo EP (×3).   
					1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la   
					videograbadora.   
					2 Inserte una cinta.   
					La reproducción comienza automáticamente   
					si inserta una cinta a la que se le ha quitado la   
					lengüeta de protección.   
					• La videograbadora no es compatible con el sistema de   
					color PAL o SECAM. Sólo es posible reproducir cintas   
					NTSC.   
					3 Presione H PLAY.   
					La pantalla del panel frontal muestra el tiempo   
					de reproducción.   
					Cuando la cinta llegue al final, se rebobinará   
					automáticamente.   
					ES   
					22   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				Opciones de reproducción   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					REPLAY/   
					ADVANCE   
					. PREV   
					> NEXT   
					H PLAY   
					X PAUSE   
					Botón   
					Operación   
					• Avanza o retrocede rápidamente si se presiona durante el modo de detención.   
					Si mantiene presionado el botón durante el avance o retroceso rápido, podrá ver la   
					imagen.   
					• Reproduce a alta velocidad cuando se presiona brevemente durante la reproducción.   
					Si mantiene presionado el botón durante la reproducción, ésta continúa a alta   
					velocidad hasta que se suelta el botón.   
					(retroceso   
					rápido/avance   
					rápido)   
					Reproduce a cámara lenta cuando se presiona en el modo de pausa.   
					(lento)   
					ADVANCE   
					• Avanza un fotograma cada vez que se presiona en modo de pausa.   
					• Avanza rápidamente la escena actual durante 30 segundos cuando se presiona   
					*1   
					durante la reproducción.   
					*2   
					REPLAY   
					Vuelve a reproducir la escena anterior cuando se presiona durante la reproducción.   
					. PREV/   
					NEXT >   
					Presiónelo durante la reproducción. La velocidad de reproducción cambia cada vez que   
					se presiona el botón:   
					–×7   
					y 
					–×5   
					y 
					–×3   
					y 
					PAUSE   
					y 
					SLOW y PLAY y ×2   
					y 
					×3   
					y 
					×5   
					y 
					×7   
					X PAUSE   
					Hace una pausa en la reproducción.   
					Si ésta dura más de cinco minutos, la reproducción se inicia automáticamente.   
					*1   
					*2   
					Puede presionarse hasta cuatro veces para avanzar   
					aproximadamente dos minutos.   
					Durante 10 segundos en modo SP o LP/ durante   
					Notas   
					• El sonido se enmudece durante la reproducción a varias   
					velocidades.   
					15 segundos en modo EP.   
					• Es posible que aparezca ruido durante la reproducción   
					inversa a alta velocidad.   
					Para reanudar la reproducción normal, presione   
					H PLAY.   
					ES   
					23   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Notas   
					• Las cintas grabadas en modo EP (×3) con esta   
					videograbadora no pueden reproducirse en pletinas de   
					video VHS que sólo tengan modo SP.   
					Grabación de la videograbadora   
					Antes de grabar   
					• Cuando se reproduzcan cintas grabadas en el modo   
					EP (×3) con esta videograbadora en otras pletinas de   
					video VHS con el modo EP, es posible que aparezca   
					ruido en la imagen.   
					Antes de empezar la grabación…   
					Compruebe que la grabadora está conectada a un   
					sintonizador como, por ejemplo, un decodificador   
					de cable o receptor vía satélite (página 3).   
					Consulte también el manual de instrucciones del   
					sintonizador.   
					Nota   
					La grabadora dispone de función de protección contra   
					copia. Los programas que incluyen señales de protección   
					contra copias del tipo Copy-Never no pueden grabarse   
					correctamente en la videograbadora.   
					Para proteger grabaciones contra el borrado   
					Para evitar borrados accidentales, rompa la   
					lengüeta de seguridad como muestra la ilustración.   
					Para volver a grabar en la cinta, cubra el orificio de   
					la lengüeta con cinta adhesiva.   
					Lengüeta de seguridad   
					Modo de grabación   
					Los modos “EP” (reproducción extendida) y “SP”   
					(reproducción estándar) están disponibles en el   
					modo de grabación (velocidad de cinta). El modo   
					“EP” proporciona un tiempo de grabación tres   
					veces superior a la duración del modo “SP”. No   
					obstante, se obtiene una mejor calidad de imagen   
					y sonido con el modo “SP”.   
					Tiempo máximo de grabación   
					Longitud de   
					cinta   
					SP   
					EP   
					T-120   
					T-160   
					2 horas   
					6 horas   
					8 horas   
					2 horas y   
					40 minutos   
					T-180   
					3 horas   
					9 horas   
					ES   
					24   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
					 
				4 Presione CH +/– o INPUT varias veces para   
					seleccionar el canal o la fuente de entrada   
					que desee grabar.   
					Grabación de la   
					videograbadora desde un   
					equipo conectado que no   
					tiene temporizador   
					• Cuando utilice el control de decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite, seleccione el   
					canal presionando CH +/– en el mando a   
					distancia de esta grabadora. La entrada de la   
					grabadora se cambia a la entrada conectada   
					(LINE1 o LINE2). También es posible   
					utilizar los botones numéricos.   
					• Cuando no utilice el control de   
					Es posible grabar programas de televisión en la   
					grabadora a través del decodificador de cable/   
					receptor vía satélite conectado.   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite,   
					seleccione la entrada conectada (LINE1 o   
					LINE2) presionando INPUT y, a   
					continuación, seleccione el canal en el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					CH +/–   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Presione REC MODE varias veces para   
					seleccionar el modo de grabación, “SP” o   
					“EP”.   
					INPUT   
					Para obtener más detalles sobre el modo de   
					
					6 Presione z REC.   
					Aparece “REC” en la pantalla del panel   
					frontal y se inicia la grabación.   
					Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite encendido y no cambie el canal que   
					está grabando.   
					H PLAY   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					z REC   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Presione x STOP.   
					Para hacer una pausa en la grabación   
					Presione X PAUSE.   
					Para reiniciar la grabación, presione X PAUSE de   
					nuevo.   
					Si hace una pausa en la grabación de más de cinco   
					minutos, ésta se detiene automáticamente.   
					1 Encienda la grabadora y el decodificador   
					de cable/receptor vía satélite.   
					2 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la   
					videograbadora.   
					Para ver un DVD durante la grabación   
					Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora, inserte   
					un disco y, a continuación, presione H PLAY.   
					3 Inserte una cinta provista de lengüeta de   
					seguridad.   
					z Observaciones   
					• La información de la cinta visualizada en la pantalla del   
					televisor no se grabará en la cinta.   
					• Es posible apagar el televisor durante la grabación.   
					ES   
					,continúa   
					25   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				Notas   
					Grabación con   
					• No es posible cambiar el modo de grabación, el canal   
					ni la fuente de entrada durante la grabación.   
					• Si inserta una cinta a la que se haya quitado la lengüeta   
					de seguridad, ésta se expulsará cuando presione   
					z REC.   
					temporizador de   
					videograbadora desde un   
					equipo conectado   
					Grabación mediante la función   
					Quick Timer (Grabación con   
					temporizador presionando un solo   
					botón)   
					Puede ajustar el temporizador para un total de   
					12 programas utilizando la grabación de DVD con   
					temporizador y la grabación de videograbadora   
					con temporizador con un máximo de un mes de   
					anticipación.   
					Puede ajustar la grabadora para que grabe en   
					incrementos de 30 minutos.   
					1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la   
					videograbadora.   
					Nota   
					No opere el decodificador de cable ni el receptor vía   
					satélite justo antes ni durante una grabación con   
					temporizador, ya que ello puede impedir la grabación   
					correcta de un programa.   
					2 Presione z REC varias veces para definir   
					la duración.   
					Cada vez que se presione el botón, el tiempo   
					aumentará en 30 minutos, hasta un máximo de   
					seis horas.   
					VIDEO   
					(Grabación   
					normal)   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					0:30   
					1:00   
					5:30 6:00   
					“c” y “OTR” se iluminan y el tiempo de   
					grabación restante aparece en la pantalla del   
					panel frontal.   
					Cuando el contador llega a “0:00”, la   
					grabadora detiene la grabación y se apaga.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TIMER   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Para cancelar el Quick Timer   
					x STOP   
					Presione z REC varias veces hasta que aparezca   
					el contador en la pantalla del panel frontal. La   
					grabadora vuelve al modo de grabación normal.   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Presione x STOP dos veces.   
					1 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la   
					videograbadora.   
					2 Inserte una cinta provista de lengüeta de   
					seguridad.   
					ES   
					26   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				3 Presione TIMER.   
					5 Presione ENTER.   
					Aparecerá el menú Lista de temporizador. Se   
					ilumina el indicador c en la pantalla del panel   
					frontal, y la grabadora está lista para   
					comenzar a grabar.   
					Temporizador – Estándar   
					10:10 AM   
					N 
					No.01   
					0 
					Edit.   
					0Sop. FechaInicioFin   
					Can   
					Modo   
					• Si el indicador c parpadea en la pantalla del   
					panel frontal, compruebe que ha insertado   
					una cinta con la lengüeta de seguridad   
					intacta.   
					0 
					VCR   
					Hoy   
					09 00   
					: 
					10 : 00   
					Línea1   
					SP   
					PM   
					PM   
					0 
					0 
					0 
					6 Presione SYSTEM MENU para quitar el   
					menú.   
					No es necesario apagar la grabadora antes de   
					que empiece la grabación con temporizador.   
					Deje el decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite encendido y no cambie el canal   
					seleccionado hasta que la grabadora finalice la   
					grabación con temporizador.   
					4 Seleccione un elemento utilizando </,   
					y ajústelo utilizando M/m.   
					A “Sop.”: seleccione “VCR.”   
					B “Fecha”: ajusta la fecha mediante M.   
					Para grabar el mismo programa todos los   
					días o el mismo día todas las semanas,   
					presione m.   
					Para detener la grabación   
					Presione x STOP dos veces.   
					El elemento cambia de la siguiente   
					manera:   
					Hoy yDom-Sáb (de domingo a sábado)   
					y Lun-Sáb (de lunes a sábado) y   
					Lun-Vie (de lunes a viernes) y   
					Dom (todos los domingos) y   
					Lun (todos los lunes) y … y   
					Sáb (todos los sábados) y   
					Para utilizar la función Ajustar modo grab.   
					Si la longitud restante de la cinta es demasiado   
					corta para la grabación actual, la videograbadora   
					cambiará automáticamente el modo de grabación   
					de SP a EP.   
					Cuando ajuste el temporizador, seleccione   
					“AUTO” en “Modo”. Presione SYSTEM MENU   
					y ajuste “Longitud de cinta” - “Función   
					videograbadora” de “Opciones” en la pantalla   
					“Configuración”.   
					1 mes más tarde y … y Hoy   
					C “Inicio”: establece la hora de inicio.   
					D “Fin”: establece la hora de finalización.   
					E “Can”: selecciona el canal o la fuente   
					de entrada.   
					Notas   
					• Aunque lo ajuste correctamente, es posible que el   
					programa no se grabe si se está realizando otra   
					grabación o si se superpone otro ajuste de temporizador   
					con prioridad.   
					• No es posible grabar en una cinta a la que se le haya   
					quitado la lengüeta de seguridad.   
					• Antes de comenzar la grabación con temporizador,   
					“TIMER REC” parpadea en la pantalla del panel   
					frontal.   
					• La grabadora se apaga automáticamente cuando   
					finaliza una grabación con temporizador, incluso   
					aunque la grabación comenzase con la grabadora   
					encendida.   
					• Cuando utilice el control de   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite, seleccione el canal.   
					• Cuando no utilice el control de   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite, seleccione la entrada, LINE1 o   
					LINE2. Seleccione el canal en el   
					decodificador de cable/receptor vía   
					satélite conectado antes de iniciar la   
					grabación con temporizador.   
					F “Modo”: selecciona el modo de   
					grabación; “SP” o “EP”. Para utilizar la   
					función Ajustar modo grab.   
					(página 27), seleccione “AUTO”.   
					Si se equivoca, seleccione el elemento y   
					cambie el ajuste.   
					ES   
					27   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				1 Presione DVD e inserte un disco grabable.   
					Para seleccionar el modo de grabación,   
					presione REC MODE varias veces (consulte   
					
					Copiado (CINTA y DVD)   
					Copiado de una cinta VHS a   
					un DVD   
					2 Inserte una cinta VHS de origen.   
					3 Presione VIDEO para utilizar la   
					videograbadora.   
					+ 
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					RW   
					4 Inicie la reproducción de la cinta VHS y, a   
					continuación, presione x STOP o   
					X PAUSE en el punto en el que desee   
					iniciar el proceso de copiado.   
					Puede grabar (copiar) fácilmente una cinta VHS   
					en un disco. Antes de hacerlo, realice los ajustes de   
					audio necesarios en la videograbadora.   
					Para seleccionar el sonido de la   
					videograbadora, presione AUDIO durante la   
					reproducción.   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					AUDIO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					5 Presione T VIDEO en la grabadora.   
					Comienza el copiado.   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					Para detener el copiado   
					Presione x STOP.   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos   
					segundos en detener el copiado.   
					H PLAY   
					Para copiar mediante el menú en pantalla   
					x STOP   
					1 
					Después de realizar el paso 4 descrito   
					anteriormente, presione SYSTEM MENU.   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					2 
					Seleccione “Copiado” del menú del sistema y   
					presione ENTER.   
					Copiado   
					10:10 AM   
					Lista títulos   
					Temporizador   
					Copiado sencillo   
					Copiado de programas   
					Copiado DV/D8   
					Editar   
					TVIDEO   
					Copiado   
					Ajuste del disco   
					Configuración   
					3 
					Seleccione “Copiado sencillo” y presione   
					ENTER.   
					Copiado   
					10:10 AM   
					Lista títulos   
					Temporizador   
					Editar   
					Copiado sencillo   
					VIDEO --> DVD   
					DVD --> VIDEO   
					Copiado de programas   
					Copiado DV/D8   
					Copiado   
					Ajuste del disco   
					Configuración   
					ES   
					28   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
					 
				4 
					5 
					Seleccione “VIDEO t DVD” y presione   
					ENTER.   
					La pantalla solicita confirmación.   
					Copiado de un DVD a una   
					cinta VHS   
					Seleccione “Sí” y presione ENTER.   
					Comienza el copiado.   
					+ 
					RW   
					- 
					- 
					+ 
					R 
					- 
					- 
					RVideo   
					RWVR RWVideo   
					RVR   
					DVD RAM   
					z Observaciones   
					• Si aparece una pantalla negra (sin señal) al final del   
					disco copiado, no se trata de un mal funcionamiento.   
					Esta pantalla se graba si existen diferencias entre el   
					tiempo del disco y de la cinta al detener la grabación.   
					• En el proceso de copiado de una cinta VHS a un DVD,   
					es posible que la lectura del contador de la cinta VHS   
					difiera ligeramente del tiempo de grabación del DVD.   
					• Durante el copiado, se emite el sonido de reproducción   
					de la videograbadora.   
					Es posible grabar (copiar) un título de DVD a una   
					cinta VHS. Tenga en cuenta que cuando graba   
					software protegido contra copias a una cinta, es   
					posible que la imagen aparezca desestabilizada al   
					reproducir la cinta.   
					Antes de realizar el copiado, efectúe los ajustes de   
					audio necesarios en la grabadora de DVD.   
					Notas   
					DVD   
					VIDEO   
					1 
					4 
					7 
					2 
					5 
					8 
					0 
					3 
					6 
					9 
					• El copiado no podrá realizarse si:   
					– utiliza un DVD no grabable.   
					– utiliza un software VHS con funciones de protección   
					contra copia.   
					• El copiado se detiene cuando:   
					– la cinta VHS alcanza el final y se detiene.   
					– la pletina de video VHS o la pletina de DVD se   
					detiene.   
					SUBTITLE   
					AUDIO   
					TOP MENU   
					SYSTEM   
					MENU   
					TITLE LIST   
					M/m/</,,   
					ENTER   
					– se agota el tiempo restante del disco.   
					• El menú del sistema, el menú OPTIONS y la pantalla   
					de información no se muestran durante el proceso de   
					copiado.   
					x STOP   
					X PAUSE   
					REC MODE   
					• Derechos de autor   
					– Las grabaciones realizadas de cintas VHS y otros   
					materiales con derechos de autor son únicamente para   
					disfrute individual, y cualquier otro uso no autorizado   
					está prohibido por las leyes de los derechos de autor.   
					– La edición no autorizada de material protegido por   
					los derechos de autor está prohibida por las leyes de   
					los derechos de autor.   
					DVDt   
					1 Presione VIDEO e inserte una cinta VHS   
					con la lengüeta de seguridad colocada en   
					su sitio.   
					Para seleccionar el modo de grabación, SP o   
					EP, presione REC MODE varias veces   
					
					ES   
					,continúa   
					29   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
					 
				4 
					5 
					Seleccione “DVD t VIDEO” y presione   
					ENTER.   
					La pantalla solicita confirmación.   
					2 Inserte un disco de origen.   
					3 Presione DVD para utilizar la grabadora de   
					DVD.   
					Seleccione “Sí” y presione ENTER.   
					Comienza el copiado.   
					4 Presione TOP MENU o TITLE LIST para   
					seleccionar un título.   
					Si aparece el menú del disco al finalizar la   
					reproducción del DVD, presione x STOP   
					para detener el proceso de copiado ya que, de   
					lo contrario, el menú del disco quedará   
					grabado hasta que la cinta llegue al final.   
					5 Inicie la reproducción del DVD y, a   
					continuación, presione x STOP o   
					X PAUSE en el punto en el que desee   
					iniciar el proceso de copiado.   
					Para seleccionar el sonido, idioma o los   
					subtítulos del DVD, presione AUDIO o   
					SUBTITLE durante la reproducción (consulte   
					
					z Observaciones   
					• Es posible que el brillo de la imagen de reproducción   
					varíe del de la reproducción de DVD normal.   
					• Es posible que el tiempo de reproducción del DVD   
					difiera ligeramente de la lectura del contador de la cinta   
					VHS.   
					6 Presione DVD t en la grabadora.   
					Comienza el copiado.   
					• El sonido que se reproduce (principal, secundario, etc.)   
					es el sonido copiado.   
					Para detener el copiado   
					Presione x STOP.   
					Notas   
					• El copiado se detiene cuando:   
					Tenga en cuenta que la grabadora demora algunos   
					segundos en detener el copiado.   
					– el DVD se reproduce hasta el final y se detiene.   
					– la pletina de video VHS o la pletina de DVD se   
					detiene.   
					– se agota el tiempo restante de la cinta.   
					• El menú del sistema, el menú OPTIONS y la pantalla   
					de información no se muestran durante el proceso de   
					copiado.   
					Para copiar mediante el menú en pantalla   
					1 
					Después de realizar el paso 5 descrito   
					anteriormente, presione SYSTEM MENU.   
					2 
					Seleccione “Copiado” del menú del sistema y   
					presione ENTER.   
					• Derechos de autor   
					– Las grabaciones realizadas de discos y otros   
					materiales con derechos de autor son únicamente para   
					disfrute individual, y cualquier otro uso no autorizado   
					está prohibido por las leyes de los derechos de autor.   
					– La edición no autorizada de material protegido por   
					los derechos de autor está prohibida por las leyes de   
					los derechos de autor.   
					Copiado   
					10:10 AM   
					Lista títulos   
					Copiado sencillo   
					Copiado de programas   
					Copiado DV/D8   
					Temporizador   
					Editar   
					Copiado   
					Ajuste del disco   
					Configuración   
					3 
					Seleccione “Copiado sencillo” y presione   
					ENTER.   
					Copiado   
					10:10 AM   
					Lista títulos   
					Temporizador   
					Editar   
					Copiado sencillo   
					VIDEO --> DVD   
					DVD --> VIDEO   
					Copiado de programas   
					Copiado DV/D8   
					Copiad   
					Ajuste del disco   
					Configuración   
					ES   
					30   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				Sony Corporation Printed in China   
					AK68-01326A   
					Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.   
				 |